JP2020028617A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with an improved presentation effect.SOLUTION: When a super ready-to-win A is to occur, as shown at (C), a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed in an image display device 5 and a ready-to-win presentation is started. When a prescribed time is elapsed from a start of the ready-to-win presentation, such as a termination of an introduction portion of the ready-to-win presentation, a title 31AK002 of the super ready-to-win A is displayed across the whole screen of the image display device 5 as shown at (D), and from a speaker 8, a sound corresponding to the title name of the ready-to-win is outputted. Thereby, the title of the super ready-to-win A is notified.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  There has been proposed a gaming machine that performs title display for notifying the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect (for example, see Patent Literature 1).

JP-A-2006-101428

  In a gaming machine such as that described in Patent Document 1, it is desired to enhance the effect of production.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with an enhanced effect.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A suggestion effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (eg, a reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).
According to such a configuration, the effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common mode (for example, FIG. 9C).
According to such a configuration, it can be noticed which of the suggestion effects is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
At a plurality of execution timings during the suggestion effect execution, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
An execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is announced.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of the above (4),
The ratio in which the advantageous state is controlled may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The suggestion effect execution means may be configured to be able to execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's movement;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for performing specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of the detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17 (E), FIG. 18 (I)),
During the valid period of the detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7),
As a suggestion display indicating the degree of expectation of the control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display of the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed during the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A) Display means (for example, an image having a second size reach title image 31AK062 displayed at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 19 (d)) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size. Further comprising a display device 5 and an effect control CPU 120).
The display means,
A plurality of types of elements having different aspects (elements E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (d)) Can be displayed (for example, fruit patterns shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D).
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Either the shutter image 31AK061 or the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D may be displayed such that the elements E1 to E5 are included).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the specific image is displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern and a kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of notice effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine with a gaming machine frame opened. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a losing fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a non-reach loss variation pattern judgment table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 150IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 150IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 150IW. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating processing executed when power is turned on. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control main processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial appearance determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect determination table before a game. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect determination process during a game. It is an explanatory view showing a suggestion effect determination table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a puzzle effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a puzzle effect setting process. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a puzzle effect determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a puzzle production mode decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit effect determination processing. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit suggestion effect determination table, a character effect effect determination table, and a light guide plate effect determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of a puzzle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of a puzzle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of a puzzle effect. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a security cover according to a first modification. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for gaming machines in the modification 1. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a security cover according to a second modification. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for gaming machines in the modification 2. It is an explanatory view showing a pachinko gaming machine in a modification 3.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting prize port that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is Is in the closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is on (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 6B only needs to change between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and a special winning opening as a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball becomes large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is on, the special winning opening door opens the large winning opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol display device 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, the big hit symbol is obtained. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the state is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is defined as a timing when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, and a timing when the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It is continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared. The type has been set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit game state is ended, the time may be controlled to a time saving state or a certain change state depending on the big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time of fluctuating fluctuating time (period of fluctuating fluctuating figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "per-figure hit" in the frug drawing game is improved than in the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, and is therefore an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than that in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

  The time saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. The condition that the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times is an end condition is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). This is a state in which the same control is performed as when the processing is not executed).

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to excite the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the variable display of the decorative symbol may be in a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described later. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state is ended, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative design variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By executing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, various tables and the like referred to when making various determinations to be described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal) is provided.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass or exit) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start-up switch (first start-up switch 22A and second start-up switch 22B), count switch 23). (Such as a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle enters) and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game state (for example, start and end of variable display, opening state of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, number of storages held, game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating a lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

  The sound output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a restoration process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after ending the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hits) and start information (start information) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the state has changed to a certain probability) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process at each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized. See below).

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per day" is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out award balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of stored holds is executed. When a winning start occurs, a random number for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of storages to be held, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning prize, the number of storages to be held, and pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the winning start-up thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", or a big hit type in the case of "big hit" Is determined (prior determination) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special figure game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the special special pattern normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of the winning (also referred to as winning the order).

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting processing, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is used by using a random number value for variation pattern determination based on a result of a predetermined determination as to whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. And the like are determined. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is designated (variable display pattern, etc.).

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change process includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation reaches the special figure fluctuation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol fluctuation processing ends.

  The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The processing for making the setting is included. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “losing”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. If the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the time reduction state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of “big hit” or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the special winning opening is opened has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether or not the number of hits has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like to perform a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release processing ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits is a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and the timing of returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the big winning port is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt inhibition. However, if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt inhibit state is used, an interrupt is generated. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. For example, it turns on a provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S75, an effect control process processing is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative illuminant such as a decoration LED, a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of the device, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using the various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether to start variable display of a decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether a command for designating the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11 or the like. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and transmitting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects control such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such an effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The waiting process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. To ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect effect processing. Also, if the reception wait time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the wait process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . In addition, in the small hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls based on the set contents at the end of the small hit game state. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit middle rendering process, the value of the rendering control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process in response to, for example, receiving a command designating the big hit gaming state from the main board 11. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the gaming media is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

  The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “differentiate”) is that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a view for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode and the display result is "losing". And the display result is "big hit", such as reach-losing variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, in which the display mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "losing". There are prepared the following fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach AE are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that indicates that it is controlled to the big hit state. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B <Super reach A increases in order. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. In addition, during the super-reach reach effect, an advanced effect that evolves (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves into a super-reach one step higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability. As shown in FIG. 8B, the title notification mode differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and sound. As described above, the notification of the title is executed by the effect device of the reach with the higher reliability than the reach with the lower reliability. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively instigated, and the production effect can be improved. The notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the font of the title character (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) or the typeface (line, square, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the effect of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of the production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of a rendering operation according to the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect production operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. . Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 9 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 on the “left” and “right” is stopped and the reach mode is reached. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and a reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses from the start of the super-reach production, such as the end of the introduction part of the super-reach production (also referred to as super-reach production), the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character of “SP Reach A”) is displayed and the sound (here, “Super Reach A”) corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is announced. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (E), the character 31AK003 which is the enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which characters confront each other is also referred to as a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a friendly character wins, a big hit occurs, and if the friendly character loses, a loss occurs.

  In addition, when the words are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed as subtitles in a lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach effect is started, such as when the introduction part of the super reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 9 (F), the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. In this case, the character “SP Reach B” is displayed, and a sound (here, “Super Reach B”) corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8, thereby notifying the Super Reach B title. You. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is deleted, the character 31AK006, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are confronted as shown in FIG. 9 (G). The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super reach effect is shown to the player, and the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And Super Reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G). In the introductory portion until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9C). In this way, the player can be noticed which super-reach is to be made since the super-reach effect is started, and which title is to be notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to the completely common production mode until the title is announced. At least one super-reach can be determined by watching the production, for example. The sections may have a common effect mode. For example, in the introductory part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) may be executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. As described above, the title notification may be executed after the super reach can be specified.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character of “SP Reach D”) is displayed at a part of the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At the same time, a sound (here, “defeat the enemy”) corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach D. As described above, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Under the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion indication 31AK008 indicating the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but does not have to completely match the big hit reliability of the reach.

  It should be noted that the notification by the voice of Super Reach D does not report the title as it is, but reports the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice differs depending on the type of the reach. Thereby, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is announced in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the expectation degree of the reach even during the reach effect. Although FIG. 9 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 9 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9 (J), the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. You.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character of "SP Reach E") is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. Thus, the title of Super Reach E is announced. In the super reach E, the notification of the title by voice is not performed. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed. Be executed. As described above, in the super reach E, the title is notified in accordance with the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach E, the title 31AK010 is continuously displayed during the reach effect.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E having a low jackpot reliability, by giving the title information without stopping the progress of the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9D, 9F, and 9F). H)). By doing so, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the super reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Also, in contrast to this embodiment, in a super-reach reach production with high jackpot reliability, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach effect of the super reach having a low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the superreach effect, and Super Reach D and Super Reach have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production, but the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production in the case of the reach with a high jackpot reliability, and the super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. Is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, title notification is executed in a wider display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is displayed as a title notification background. (Title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Also, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method for changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be made different.

(Expectation degree suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in the super reach A and the super reach B having the high jackpot reliability, the super reach D having the lower jackpot reliability than the super reach A and the super reach B is displayed without displaying the indication of the expectation. In the title notification in, an indication of the degree of expectation was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expected degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E.

  Note that the indication of the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 9 (H) and the like, and the degree of expectation may be indicated by a meter or a gauge. The set numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9 (H) and the like, in the case where the number of black stars is indicated, half (or half) black stars may be displayed, and the number of levels of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, it is possible to pay attention to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until a predetermined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of the reach can be grasped even during the super reach effect. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in any case in order to improve the effect.

  Note that, here, the effect of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, but for example, a title notification or an expectation suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decided production)
When it is time to derive the display result (the end of the variable display) after each reach effect has been executed, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a "big hit" is executed. The determined effect includes a determined effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a determined effect indicating that the display result is "losing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a fixed effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (C), and a big hit combination is formed as shown in FIG. 10 (D). A fixed decorative symbol is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the fixed effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and sharp title notification can be executed.

  In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced and the variable display is executed at the lower right portion of the image display device 5. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of the item may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  In addition, when the character display which is resident during the hold display, the active display, and the variable display, and the display related to the mobile communication are displayed on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately not displayed during the super-reach reach effect so as to focus on the reach effect. It may be. At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting a low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development stage)
Next, an example of an effect operation when an extended effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the extended effect is performed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown, an effect is performed in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. Thereafter, when the game reaches the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of the super reach A is announced, and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. In the case of evolving to Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of Super Reach B is announced, and a Reach effect of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the title of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  It should be noted that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11B, but may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sand storm (display indicating failure) is displayed. You may do so. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasses, such as a performance in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 9 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 is configured to display black stars indicating the expectation degree from the beginning. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation indicator 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation indicator 31AK021 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation indicator 31AK021 moves. An effect that fits into one of the white stars is performed. At this time, a sound of “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed step by step each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted, as shown in FIG. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect has ended.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. However, two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed, and the degree of expectation may be raised by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of displayed stars (the number of stages of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the effect indicating the degree of expectation is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. The same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, and fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases increases Such an effect may be performed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif displayed on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like need only be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by a player's operation.

  FIGS. 12 (G) to 12 (L) are examples of the production operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion production when the special mode is set when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (F), title notification and expectation degree effect production are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is a reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect form from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. The expectation degree indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation indicator 31AK024 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves to display the expectation indicator 31AK024. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound of “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. When the number of black diamonds corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 12 (L), the black diamond is highlighted as if it glows. In this way, by making the notification mode of the title different depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the selection of the player, the game state, and the like, the effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. improves.

  FIG. 12 shows an example of the production operation when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is designated. However, depending on the production mode (the state when the reach production is executed), other reach productions (title notification, expected degree suggestion production). May be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether to notify the title of the reach or the execution ratio of the title notification may be made different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the effect according to the preference of the player can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is indicated by the number of black stars in the degree of expectation indication display, and an expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. May be executed in such a manner that the number of displays suggesting is gradually reduced. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to, or instead of, the expectation effect effect of the present embodiment.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, in the case where the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is announced and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, a button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. An extended effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of super reach C (here, the character of “SP reach C”) is displayed, and The title of Reach C is announced. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the title of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. Under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 having three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. Note that, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect in which the title and the expected degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary production)
In this embodiment, a title announcement for announcing the jackpot reliability is executed as an announcement effect according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (A), the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title of Reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of Super Reach A. After that, as shown in FIG. 14B, a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. As described above, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title announcement shown in FIG. 14, the title display mode (display color) may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the display of the title.

  When a title notice in which the title display mode (display color) is changed is executed, after the title display mode has been changed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The title notification by voice may be executed after the title display mode (display color) changes. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or an advanced effect that improves the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot advantageous state. By doing in this way, once the title is announced, an effect of increasing the degree of expectation can be executed, and thus the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an announcement effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute an announcement effect and an effect mode. The announcement effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super-reach (whether or not to execute a title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined in accordance with the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, for example, according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing". As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the super reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and changes from “black” to “fruit pattern”. There are also items that change from "red" to "fruit pattern", and the big hit reliability increases in this order (ascending order). In other words, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the title display color changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  The “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is a “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area may be a “fruit pattern”. . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. For the display color change, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed, as shown in FIG. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. In addition, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes depending on the type of super reach may be made different. In the case of a super reach having a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided, and the changing timing may be determined to any one. In the case of a super reach having a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or a smaller number than a super reach having a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined in the normal mode at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. Determine the title display color at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and display color change timing) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the character display mode (for example, the display color of the line) in the super reach reach effect.

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the words of the character in the reach attainment of the super reach (whether or not to execute a speech notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing", for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach effect are changed from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”, and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the display color of the dialogue changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  In addition, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, in the case where the same announcement mode (display color) is included in the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same announcement mode is achieved. In addition, the big hit reliability may be made different by a combination of the timing of change of the presentation mode between the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change occurs first. By doing so, it is possible to focus attention on the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialog may be determined at a different rate from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  Note that, in place of the dialogue announcement, an announcement effect for notifying the jackpot reliability based on a change in the effect mode of the reach effect may be executed. In this case, in the notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other notice effects and the effect form are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (Step AK31S005), and the announcement effect determination process ends.

  Note that in this embodiment, the title advance notice and the dialogue advance notice can be executed in the case of the super reach, but in the case of the specific super reach (for example, other than the super reach with low reliability), the title advance notice is provided. And at least one of dialogue notices may be made executable. In addition, although the title announcement and the speech announcement have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and the determination ratio may be different depending on, for example, the type of super reach. By doing so, a notice effect can be executed according to the type of the reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable effect modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing in this way, the effects can be varied and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing so, a notice effect with a sense of unity can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
When the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue of the dialogue change, an effect indicating that the presentation mode changes may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an effect effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the line may be changed. The effect mode of the action effect (action effect image and the like) may be common to both the title and the line. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change despite the execution of the action effect. In the case of executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result regarding the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the speech notice changes in the effect mode (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect. The ratio of the effect of the effect and the effect of the line notice (the ratio of the effect) may be different, or the ratio of the color (how many steps) the effect changes may be different. . By executing such an action effect, when the action effect image is displayed, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the line is to be applied, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence or absence of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect mode. By doing in this way, an action effect corresponding to the effect mode can be performed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of a title and a line in accordance with the effect content of the reach effect (for example, an effect of a character or an effect in a battle effect). May be changed. In this way, the player pays attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Here, it is referred to as a sub liquid crystal, but the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5 or the like, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be executed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is displayed continuously after the notification of the title, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the image display device 5 notifies the title, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the expected degree suggestion display. By doing so, it is possible to display the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a title of a reach effect as a suggestive effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to title information relating to other effects (notice of mainly displaying characters). You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when performing a look-ahead zone effect of shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, and the like) in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are different, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When a mission ("Let's reach at 7", "Eliminate enemies using a stick controller", etc.) is presented, and a mission effect that is in a state advantageous to the player when the mission is completed is executed, The present invention may be applied to title notification of a mission.

(Variation 1 of characteristic portion 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, the determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and thereafter, the display result is displayed ( FIG. 10 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving a display result, an operation effect prompting operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing so, the display result is displayed in accordance with the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  FIGS. 17 and 18 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect operation in a modification in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17A, after the image display device 5 has reached the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17B, a character 31AK041 as a friend character and a character 31AK042 as an enemy character are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 18 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modified example, a plurality of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is to be executed are prepared. The big hit reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode having higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17E, the praying character 31AK045 changes to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 becomes the large button image 31AK047. Changes to

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and a bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be displayed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modified example, when the operation effect image changes, the effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may be different depending on the type of the effect effect.

  Thereafter, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18J, and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18K. Is displayed to prompt the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. At this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a fixed decoration symbol which is a big hit combination is derived. If no operation is detected within the predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

  In this modified example, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images is performed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even when an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, the operation effect image may change to a reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved and the expectation of the player is improved. Can be maintained.

  Note that, in the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but as appropriate, in parallel with the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the effect effect or not, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 31AK)
A suggestion indicating the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state may be displayed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display after the start of the variable display is executed. In the reach title effect, after the reach, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability and displayed with a plurality of types of elements included in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. In addition, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to a difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when a reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <a blue image <a red image <a fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title of red characters). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When the shutter display and the reach title display are performed, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and notifies the game effect lamp 9 by emitting light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such a shutter display and a reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is performed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is performed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 19B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, a super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, at the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed at the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of the super reach to be executed are shown as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "Battle Reach" indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is performed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after the common sound is output, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the hit reliability is high, such as "hot hot". Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, as described above, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. In addition, although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the character "BATTLE WIN!" Is displayed at the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen using the original numeric symbols. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. This makes it possible to suitably display the fruit pattern image in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thus, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. In this way, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to the overlapping of the execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. In this case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 in FIG. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 15 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 150IW)
Next, the characteristic section 150IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 150IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board constituting a gaming board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1), and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 150IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area. In the gaming machine frame 150IW003, a glass door frame 150IW003a having a glass window is positioned between a door opening position for opening the front surface of the gaming machine frame 150IW003 centering on the left side and a door closing position for closing the front surface. The game area is provided rotatably, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 150IW003a. When the glass door frame 150IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a clerk or the like of a game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. Players other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 150IW003 and glass The door frame 150IW003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 150IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 150IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later.

  The setting switching main unit provided with an operation unit such as the setting key 150IW051 that can be operated by the player is housed in the board case 150IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 150IW051 does not open the board case 150IW201. Is exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the right side of the rear surface of the substrate case 150IW201 so that it can be operated.

  Since the board case 150IW201 having the setting key 150IW051 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is impossible to operate the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The operation becomes possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using the door key of the game machine. The setting key 150IW051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a clerk or the like at the game arcade, so that only the clerk having the setting key can operate. The setting key 150IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the feature section 150IW, the door key and the setting key are exemplified as separate keys, but one key may be shared.

  Further, on the board case 150IW201, a display monitor 150IW029 and a display changeover switch 150IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 150IW029 are arranged. The display monitor 150IW029 and the display changeover switch 150IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and are arranged at the upper left of the board case 150IW201. That is, the display monitor 150IW029 and the display changeover switch 150IW030 are arranged in front of the board case 150IW201 when the main board 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened. This is a front view when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  As described above, the setting key 150IW051 in the feature section 150IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not operated. There is a possibility that the setting key 150IW051 may be operated from the inside of the game island to be installed. Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 150IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, at the right end of the outer frame 150IW001a, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the right side of the board case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051. Security cover 150IW500A that covers the rear side of the camera. The security cover 150IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 150IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction, and a long piece 150IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 150IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , Made of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 150IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the board case 150IW201. The security cover 150IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 150IW001a via the front end of the short piece 150IW500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 20B, the long piece 150IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right side of the board case 150IW201 from behind the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. This covers the right side of the board case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 150IW051 cannot be operated by the long piece 150IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, in a state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the setting key 150IW051 moves together with the gaming machine frame 150IW003 and separates from the elongated piece 150IW500Ab to thereby remove the elongated piece. When the covering state by the 150IW500Ab is released, the state becomes operable.

  That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature 150IW is maintained in a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is regulated by the security cover 150IW500A when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. On the other hand, in a state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the above-described restriction state by the security cover 150IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 150IW051 is permitted.

  Since the board case 150IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 150IW051 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 150IW051 unless the user opens the gaming machine frame 150IW003 with the door key.

  However, in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) of the gaming arcade, even if the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 An illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate enters between the gaming machine 1 and a pachinko gaming machine 1 such as a card unit or a gaming machine installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a setting key 150IW051 on the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , The setting value may be changed by operating the., The operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted by the security cover 150IW500A when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. By maintaining the regulated state, it is possible to suitably suppress the above-mentioned misconduct.

  Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed and the right side of the back side of the board case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500A, the gaming machine frame 150IW500A is accommodated in the board case 150IW201 through the transparent security cover 150IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like can be seen through, it is possible to easily check the status of the mounting surface, sealing seal, and the like of the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

  In the characteristic portion 150IW, on the main substrate 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the general figure display result determining value Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. It should be noted that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4 and 20-5 prepared for the CPU 103 to make various types of determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11 and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. And a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), and FIG. -4 (C), a large hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), a small hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), in addition to the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A). 20-6, a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6, a general figure display result determination table (not shown), a general figure change pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature section 150IW is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (payout rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to the set value. . The set value has three stages of 1 to 3, 1 is the lowest payout rate, and the payout rate increases as the value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3, the advantage gradually increases. In the feature section 150IW, the winning probability per small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
FIGS. 20A to 20C are explanatory diagrams illustrating display result determination tables corresponding to the respective set values. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each of the display result determination tables, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subjected to the variable display, and the case where the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, a determination value for a large hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, the variable special figure designating buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. , The jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probable change, 1/32 at the time of probable change) than when the set value is "2" or "3". On the other hand, some of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “2” and “3”. It is supposed to. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Wins with the same probability (1/320 for non-probable changes and 1/32 for probable changes) when the first special symbol is the subject of variable display. I do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, the first special symbol has a smaller probability (１ ／) than the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. The winner is won.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at non-probable change, 1/30 at probable change) than in certain cases. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small value is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “1” and “3”. It is supposed to. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Wins the jackpot with the same probability (1/300 for non-probable changes and 1/30 for probable changes) when the first special symbol is the subject of variable display. I do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and Is a small hit with the same probability (1/2) as in the case of "1" and "3".

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability than the case of “2” (1/280 at the time of non-probable change, 1/28 at the time of probable change). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the small value is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “1” and “2”. It is supposed to. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Wins the jackpot with the same probability (1/280 for non-probable changes and 1/28 for probable changes) when the first special symbol is the subject of variable display. I do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and Are small wins with the same probability (1/2) as when "1" is "1" or "2".

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). If MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 20A to 20C, it is determined that the special symbol is to be set as the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, but to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hitting game state. However, the stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, a case is shown in which the winning probability per small hit is the same irrespective of the set value, but such a mode is not limited. For example, similarly to the winning probability of the big hit, the winning probability of the small hit may be increased as the value of the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. In this case, the difference in the setting of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same ratio as the difference in the setting of the winning probability of the large hit. Specifically, if the winning probability per small hit at the set value “1” is 1/100, the winning probability per small hit at the set value “2” is designed to be 1 / 93.75. The winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “3” may be set to be 1 / 87.5.

  Further, in a gaming machine having no small hit, the configuration shown by the feature section 150IW may be applied.

  Also, in the present feature unit 150IW, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C). The big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are separately provided, and the big hit determination is made depending on whether the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display are performed regardless of the variation special figure designation buffer. The determination of the small hit may be performed using a common table, and the determination of the small hit may be performed using separate tables for the case where the variable special figure designating buffer is the first and the case where the variable special figure designating buffer is the second.

  In addition, in the present characteristic unit 150IW, the case where the advantage increases in the order of the setting value “1” <the setting value “2” <the setting value “3” is shown, for example, the order of the advantage according to the gaming state May be changed. For example, the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintains the high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and is configured to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is easily obtained. In a specific game state (in this example, high probability / high base state), unlike other game states, a large hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is easy to continue). The value “1” may be set to have the highest advantage.

  Also, for example, when the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a probable change state (high probability state) and then ends a probable change state based on execution of a predetermined number of times (probability change end times), the same probability change In the case of the number of times of termination, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of continuation of change (ratio of extended holidays) increases in the order of setting value “1” <setting value “2” <setting value “3”.

  Note that, in the present characteristic portion 150IW, a total of three setting values of 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 20A is an explanatory diagram of the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In addition, in this characteristic part 150IW, the case where the big hit type is determined by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol change display is performed) A common jackpot type determination table is used for determining the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, a different table may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

  The jackpot type determination table determines the type of the jackpot from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for the jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine one of them.

  In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), a determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for the jackpot type determination is assigned for each set value. The ratio of the determined judgment value is shown. That is, the ratio of which one of the jackpot types A to C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that although a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 and a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-7, which will be described later, are actually assigned determination values corresponding to random numbers. In order to simplify, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is “2”, When the ratio determined to the big hit type B is high and the set value is “3”, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio determined to the big hit type A becomes high.

  Here, the big hit type in the main feature 150IW will be described with reference to FIG. 20-5 (B). In the main feature 150IW, a fan fare period, an interval period and an ending period in the big hit game are determined for each big hit type. Have been.

  The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the big hit opening process of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side, the start of the big hit game state is started. This is a period in which a fanfare effect as an effect operation to be notified is performed.

  The interval period is, for example, a period in which the post-big-hit opening process of step S116 is executed on the main substrate 11 side, and after the round in which the special winning opening is opened on the effect control substrate 12 side is ended, This is a period in which an interval effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the round is performed.

  The ending period is, for example, a period during which the big hit end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period to be done.

  As shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the big hit type A, the longest in the case of the big hit type B, and the longest in the case of the big hit type C. It is set to be shorter.

  As described above, in the present characteristic unit 150IW, when the set value is “1”, the percentage determined as the big hit type C is high, and thus the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively long because the ratio determined to be the big hit type A is high. Therefore, the average value of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature unit 150IW is configured so that the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit increases in the order of “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the setting value is “1”. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period is configured to be longer in the order of “<2” <“3”. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) is set high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high.

  The feature unit 150IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during the jackpot game, and this jackpot suggestion effect is performed in the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period. Executable in the period. With such a configuration, interest in the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. Further, by directing the player's interest to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

  In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

  In addition, in the feature section 150IW, a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period are set for each of the jackpot types, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined for each set value is different. When the winning probability (ball-out rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the determination values are set such that the ratio of selection of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long periods are set is high in the order of the big hit types A <B <C. Thus, the average value of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be made longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In this feature section 150IW, in each of the jackpot types A to C, the time-saving control and the probable change control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature section 150IW). The game is terminated when the figure game is executed or the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. May be performed. In the case of such a specific big hit type, a big hit game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. The characteristic portion 150IW is configured such that the ratio of the jackpot is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition to or in place of such a configuration, the probability change continues for each set value. The rates (rensole rates) may be different.

  Further, in the present feature section 150IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the time saving control and the probability change control, the number of times of control, etc.) in the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, Although the average period of the period and the ending period is configured to be different, for example, for each big hit type, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probable change control, the number of times of control are different, and the degree of advantage is different. You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each big hit type, or may be the same regardless of the big hit type.

  In this characteristic section 150IW, according to the set value, the type of the big hit when the variable display result is the big hit is determined at a different ratio from the big hit type A, the big hit type B, and the big hit type C. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C that cannot be determined is one or more. There may be more than one. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value that has been set means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific jackpot type is 100%. Deciding on a percentage is included.

  In addition, in the present characteristic unit 150IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are different depending on the type of the big hit has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending time are independent of the big hit type. You may comprise so that periods may differ. For example, according to which of the set values “1” to “3”, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period according to the set value may be determined uniformly. Further, for example, according to which of the set values “1” to “3”, a lottery process is performed with a selection probability according to the set value, and a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period are determined. May be.

  As described above, in the present characteristic unit 150IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is the jackpot is different according to the set value set, so that the gaming interest can be improved. .

  In the feature section 150IW, the jackpot type is determined using the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination may be made using MR1 which is a random number for determination.

  Also, in the present characteristic portion 150IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous to the player (the bigger hit probability and the smaller hit probability are increased, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined. Although the form is exemplified), the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous the player may be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the big hit probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming performance itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the gaming properties may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a gaming property in which the probability loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and a game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While the game state after the end of the big hit game is controlled to be in a certain state based on passing through the predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game balls pass through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the big hit type. If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the high base The game performance (so-called one-type and two-type mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the passing of a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable prize ball device 7 during the time saving control. Good. Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as 1 to 3, the gaming property is the same, but the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Furthermore, when changing the playability in accordance with the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable prize ball device 7 is switched to a production switch (a game ball passes through the count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is used as a game switch (when a game ball is set). It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a certain change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Small hit type determination table)
FIG. 20C is an explanatory diagram of the small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 20C, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types in the present feature unit 150IW. As shown in FIG. 20-5 (C), in the present characteristic unit 150IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “3”.

  In addition, in the feature portion 150IW, the opening period and the number of times of opening of the special winning opening during the small hitting game are the same regardless of which of the small hitting types A to C, and the degree of advantage in the game is the same. .

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a large hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and the variation display result is “small hit” A small hit variation pattern determination table that is used when is determined in advance, and a loss variation pattern determination table that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “losing” is prepared in advance. .

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20D is an explanatory diagram of the loss variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic section 150IW, a period (hereinafter also referred to as a special period) from the time when the setting change is performed at the time of turning on the power until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times), and another period ( (Hereinafter, also referred to as a non-special period) using a different loss variation pattern determination table.

  Specifically, during the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), and during the non-special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined as shown in FIG. 20-6 (B). The variation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature section 150IW, a special period is defined as a period from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special period may be a period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on. In addition, a special period may be set in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am) using a real-time clock or the like. Further, a period until the first big hit occurs may be set as the special period.

  In the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B), normal reach and super reach lose are set in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of the normal reach and the super reach differs according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach and the super reach are executed.

  The first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The determination value is assigned such that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, the difference in the frequency at which the normal reach is executed becomes easier to recognize in the special period than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), and therefore, the motivation to play the game in the special period Can be given to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

  Note that, for example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern thereof) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may make it. By doing so, the execution ratio of only a specific variation pattern (in this example, normal reach loss) differs according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. Conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be changed according to the set value.

  In addition, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value at the time other than the non-reach loss. The determination values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, normal reach loss: balance of super reach loss) differs. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20A, the ratio of the normal reach loss becomes significantly higher in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3” (this example). Specifically, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (B) shows the normal reach loss in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. Is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Further, the difference in the selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

  In the present feature unit 150IW, setting suggestion effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set value. This is because the execution ratio of the entire normal reach loss and the super reach loss differs depending on the set value, and depending on the set value. The concept includes that the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different, and that the execution ratios of only the normal reach loss are different depending on the set value.

  The feature unit 150IW displays a common background image on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) is used. Then, the display of the decoration symbol is changed. Also, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative design is displayed in a fluctuating manner. The dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or during a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance amusement of a game during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

  The present invention is not limited to the example of the feature section 150IW. For example, a special variation pattern suggesting a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a variation pattern different from a normal pattern and a set value of 1 or 2) Is selected only during the special period, so that the special variation pattern can be selected only during the special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

(Non-reach loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 20C is an explanatory diagram of the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. In the present feature unit 150IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided. When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be any of non-reach loss A to C. Is configured. The configuration is not limited to this. For example, the non-reach loss A to C is included in the loss variation pattern determination table illustrated in FIG. May be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 20-7, in the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined as non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is “2”. ", The ratio determined as non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is" 3 ", the ratio determined as non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is increased. Is assigned a judgment value.

  In the characteristic portion 150IW, when the set value is “1”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature unit 150IW is configured so that the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit increases in the order of “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the setting value is “1”. "<2" <"3" so that the average fluctuation time becomes longer. With such a configuration, when the winning probability of a big hit (the payout rate) is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling property becomes too high. Can be prevented.

  In the present characteristic unit 150IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different by changing the ratio of any of the non-reach losses A to C having different fluctuation times according to the set value. A plurality of types of variation patterns other than the reach loss (for example, normal reach loss and super reach loss) may be provided so that the variation time is different, and the selection ratio may be different depending on the set value. When a plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss and super reach loss) are provided so that the variation time is different, the time of the swing display or the high-speed variation display of the decorative pattern and the like are varied so as to produce effects such as effects. It is desirable that there be no difference in appearance.

  In addition, in the present characteristic portion 150IW, the average variation time is configured to be different according to the set value. However, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final decorative pattern (final The period in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, to delay the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

  In addition, in the feature section 150IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach losses A to C, and the ratio of determining which of the non-reach losses A to C is determined for each set value is different, so that the big hit is won. When the probability (the payout rate) is set to a high value, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration, but may be set for each set value. May be fixedly set, and the setting in which the jackpot winning probability (yield rate) is higher may cause the fluctuation time to be longer.

  Note that, in the present characteristic portion 150IW, a variation pattern for shortening the variation time is provided compared to other variation patterns. For example, a fluctuation pattern of a shortened non-reach loss (a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds) having a fluctuation time shorter than the non-reach loss A (a fluctuation time of 9 seconds) is provided. The shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, 3). With such a configuration, when the number of reserved storages reaches the upper limit or is in a state close to the upper limit, this state is resolved and the fluctuation display is performed efficiently (that is, the game proceeds efficiently). ). Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is equal to or more than the predetermined number. For this reason, in the present characteristic unit 150IW, the fluctuation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or more than the predetermined number has a common fluctuation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature section 150IW, the variation time for the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or more than the predetermined number may be varied according to the set value.

(Setting confirmation processing, setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic section 150IW will be described. FIG. 20-8 to FIG. 20-10 are flowcharts showing the game control main process in the characteristic unit 150IW. In the feature unit 150IW, the processing in steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing in steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

  After the initial setting, the CPU 103 waits for activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. The timer is set (step 150 IWS003). In this case, a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the effect control CPU 120 is set in the effect control means activation wait timer. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 150IWS004), and checks whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after subtraction is 0 (step 150IWS005). If the value of the effect control unit activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 150IWS004, and the processing of steps 150IWS004 to S005 is repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control unit activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 150 IWS006.

  By executing the processing of steps 150 IWS 003 to S 005, the processing after step 150 IWS 006 is executed after the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, the RAM is initialized and restored, and the like. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands, such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, and a command at the time of recovery, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the command is not lost. This can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 103 resets a RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch has been pressed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (step 150IWS006).

  In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in a power-off process (see step 150 IWS031) described later, but the RAM clear flag is cleared once in step 150 IWS006 when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and then the clear switch is set. If so, a case is shown in which the RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 150 IWS 016 and S 022). However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the RAM clear flag is also cleared when the power-off process is performed, and then, if the clear switch is set when the game machine is powered on, a new RAM clear flag is set. Is also good.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as in step S4 (step 150IWS007). Specifically, in step 150 IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 150 IWS 007; No), the process proceeds to step 150 IWS 012.

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 150 IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same processing as in step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not it is (Step 150 IWS008). In step 150IWS008, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 150 IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 150 IWS010.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 150WSWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values “1” to “3”. (Step 150 IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values “1” to “3”, the process proceeds to step 150 IWS011.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (N in step 150 IWS008) or when it is determined that the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values “1” to “3” (Y in step 150 IWS009) The CPU 103 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 102 (step 150 IWS010). Then, control goes to a step 150 IWS012.

  If the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of the setting values “1” to “3” (N in step 150 IWS009), the CPU 103 is performing the setting change process for changing the setting value. It is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag indicating that is set is set (step 150IWS011). If the setting change flag is set (step 150IWS011; Yes), that is, if power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to a power interruption during the change of the set value, the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

  In step 150IWS012, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 150IW090 is on (step 150IWS012). If the output signal from door open sensor 150IW090 is on, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 150IW051 is on or not (step 150IWS013). If the setting key 150IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 150IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear 2 process (step 150 IWS015).

  In this example, as the RAM clear processing, there are a RAM clear 1 processing (see step 150IWS051) and a RAM clear 2 processing (see step 150IWS015) executed when a RAM abnormality occurs.

  In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing a flag, a counter, and a buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, an area other than an area for storing performance display information such as a connection ratio, a winning combination, and a base and an area for storing a set value among the storage areas of the RAM 102 are cleared. Information for performance display such as the winning combination and the base, and the information of the set value are retained without being cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 processing is referred to as a clear storage area 1.

  In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing a flag, a counter, and a buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 processing, the area other than the area for storing the performance display information such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the performance display such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is cleared. Information is kept without being cleared. In the RAM clear 2 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 processing is referred to as a clear storage area 2. Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 processing is larger than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 processing.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 150IWS016), and proceeds to step 150IWS025. The RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 150IW090 is off (N in step 150IWS012), when the setting key 150IW051 is off (N in step 150IWS013), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 150IWS013). In step 150 IWS014 N), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 150 IWS017).

  Next, the CPU 103 proceeds to the loop processing of steps 150 IWS018 to S020. In the loop process, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a 4 ms wait time (step 150 IWS018). Then, when the wait time of 4 ms has elapsed, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 150IWS019 and performs a predetermined error display (step 150IWS019). For example, the CPU 103 controls the display monitor 150IW029 to display a display indicating that there is a RAM abnormality error (for example, a display of “E”). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board (step 150 IWS020). Then, the processing after step 150 IWS018 is repeatedly executed.

  By executing the processing of steps 150 IWS 007 to S 020, in the feature section 150 IW, the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 150 IWS 007 and S 008, Y in step 150 IWS 009), and a power interruption occurs during the setting change. In the case (Y of step 150IWS011), the RAM is cleared on condition that the setting key 150IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on in a state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, and the set value after step 150IWS025 is set. Can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened and the setting key 150IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the game control does not proceed.

  If the setting change flag is not set (step 150WS011; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step 150WS121). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets a RAM clear flag (step 150 IWS022).

  In this example, the RAM clear flag is set when the clear switch is first detected when the power of the gaming machine is turned on by executing the processing of steps 150IWS022 and 150IWS016. After that, between the time when the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt process (game control process) is started, there are a plurality of times of confirming whether or not the clear switch has been turned on when the power is turned on. However, instead of directly checking the state of the clear switch, by checking whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, it is determined whether or not the ON of the clear switch is detected when the power is turned on. (See steps 150 IWS025, S034, S048).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 150IW090 is on (step 150IWS023). If the output signal from door open sensor 150IW090 is on, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 150IW051 is on or not (step 150IWS024). If the setting key 150IW051 is on, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag has been set (step 150IWS025). If the RAM clear flag has not been set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting confirmation command indicating that a setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value is to be executed to the effect control CPU 120 (step 150IWS026). Then, control goes to a step 150 IWS030.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting change command indicating that the setting change processing for changing the setting value is to be executed to the effect control CPU 120 (step 150IWS027). ). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 150IWS028). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (that is, if the abnormality of the RAM 102 is detected), the CPU 103 stores the setting value determination buffer (a storage area provided in the RAM 102 for storing the current setting value) in the RAM. The set value is set to “1” (step 150 IWS029). Then, control goes to a step 150 IWS030. At this time, the CPU 103 resets the RAM abnormality flag.

  On receiving the setting confirmation command or the setting change command, the effect control board 12 performs control to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5). Is displayed, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative luminous body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, the effect control board 12 may be configured such that an operation button such as the push button 31B is pressed to display “maintenance mode” and shift to the maintenance mode. The “maintenance mode” includes, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock, the occurrence history of various errors (recording when and what kind of error occurred), the setting change history (when the set value was changed, and This is a mode in which you can check the recording of setting values. When the setting key 150IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation processing or the setting change processing ends, the maintenance mode also ends.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a 4 ms wait time (step 150 IWS030). Then, when the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 150 IWS031 and executes power-off processing (step 150 IWS031). In the power-off processing of step 150 IWS031, the CPU 103 executes processing for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not the power-on signal has been turned on). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off processing, upon detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing for storing necessary data (for example, a backup flag and a checksum) in the backup RAM area. I do.

  Next, the CPU 103 specifies the set value stored in the set value determination buffer, and displays the specified set value on the display monitor 150IW029 (step 150IWS032). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via an external terminal board (step 150 IWS033).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150 IWS034). If the RAM clear flag has not been set, the process directly proceeds to step 150 IWS043.

  If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag (step 150 IWS035) and starts the setting change process. Next, it is checked whether or not an initial setting completion flag indicating that the value of the clear switch buffer has been set for the first time since the power-on of the gaming machine has already been set (step 150IWS036). The clear switch buffer is a buffer provided in the RAM 102 for setting the input state (whether the switch is on or off) of the clear switch. For example, in the clear switch buffer, a value of “1” is set when the clear switch is on, and a value of “0” is set when the clear switch is off. If the first-time setting completed flag is set (if the value has been already set in the clear switch buffer for the first time since the power of the gaming machine was turned on), the flow directly proceeds to step 150IWS039.

  If the initially set flag is not set (that is, if the value in the clear switch buffer has not been set even once since the power of the gaming machine was turned on), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch buffer to the ON state. An indicated value (for example, “1”) is set (step 150 IWS037). Further, the CPU 103 sets the first-time setting completed flag (step 150 IWS038).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer in the previous clear switch buffer (step 150 IWS039). Note that the previous clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether it is in the on state or the off state) of the clear switch confirmed last time (4 ms before in this example). For example, a value of “1” is set in the previous clear switch buffer when the previously confirmed clear switch is in the on state, and a value of “0” is set in the previous clear switch buffer in the off state.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks the current input state of the clear switch, and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 150 IWS040). Next, the CPU 103 sets the value previously set in the clear switch buffer to the off state (eg, “0”) and sets the value set in the clear switch buffer to the on state (eg, “1”). It is confirmed whether or not it has been performed (step 150 IWS041).

  If the value previously set in the clear switch buffer is off and the value set in the clear switch buffer is on, the CPU 103 updates the set value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029. At the same time, it is displayed and stored in the set value confirmation buffer (updated and stored for the set value already stored) (step 150 IWS042). For example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 is updated to “2”, and the set value “2” is stored in the set value determination buffer. When "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 is updated to "3", and the set value "3" is stored in the set value determination buffer. When “3” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 is updated to “1”, and the set value “1” is stored in the set value determination buffer.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 150IW051 is on (step 150IWS043). If the setting key 150IW051 remains on, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030, where the processing of steps 150IWS030 to S043 is repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation processing and the setting change processing are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key 150IW051 is off, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation processing and the setting change processing, and proceeds to step 150IWS044.

  When the RAM clear flag is not set (that is, when the clear switch is not turned on at the time of turning on the power of the gaming machine) by executing the processing of steps 150WSS25 to S043 (steps 150WS25, S034) N), a setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 150 IWS 026), and a setting confirmation process (particularly, step 150 IWS 032) is performed, but not a setting change process. On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is set (that is, when the clear switch is turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on) (Y in step 150 IWS025, S034), a setting change command is transmitted (step 150IWS027). At the same time, a setting confirmation process (especially, step 150 IWS032) and a setting change process (especially, 150 IWS035-S042) are performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) in a security information timer for setting an output period of the security signal (step 150 IWS044). In this example, when the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the external output of the security signal is started by executing the process of step 150 IWS033. In step 150 IWS044, the security information timer is set, and the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, so that the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And output to the outside.

  On the other hand, in this example, the security signal is externally output even when a RAM abnormality or the like occurs by executing the processing of step 150 IWS020. In this case, the power supply to the gaming machine is reset. Until the security signal is output, the security signal is continuously output to the outside.

  Next, the CPU 103 resets the setting change flag (step 150 IWS045). Further, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 (step 150IWS046). The CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 150WS047).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150 IWS048). If the RAM clear flag has not been set, the flow shifts to the recovery process in step 150 IWS049. Note that the processing of steps 150IWS049 and S050 in the feature unit 150IW is the same as the processing of steps S6 and S7 shown in FIG.

  If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process and performs the process of clearing the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 (150WS051). Note that the processing of steps 150IWS052 to S055 in the feature unit 150IW is the same as the processing of steps S9 to S12 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 20-11 is an explanatory diagram of the processing executed when the power is turned on. As shown in FIG. 20-11, when the setting key 150IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (and when the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on in the feature section 150IW. If so, the setting confirmation process (particularly, step 150 IWS032) and the setting change process (particularly, 150 IWS035 to S042) are executed, the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 150 IWS051)) is executed, and the clear switch is off. For example, only the setting confirmation process (particularly, step 150IWS032) is executed, and the recovery process (step 150IWS049) is executed. When the setting key 150IW051 is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, only the initialization processing (RAM clear 1 processing (step 150IWS051)) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, Only the recovery process (step 150 IWS049) is executed.

  Next, a display mode of the display monitor 150IW029 in the setting confirmation processing and the setting change processing will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (A) and 20-12 (B), when the power is turned off (turned off) by an operation of a game room clerk or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply stops, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 ends. In addition, if the big winning port is open at the timing of turning off the power, such as during a big hit game or a small hit game, the supply of power to the solenoid 82 is stopped to close the big winning port.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20C, when a clerk or the like of the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 150IW051 is turned on. The setting check processing is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting is satisfied, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029.

  In the state where the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (D), the CPU 103 detects an operation of the clear switch by a store clerk or the like in the game hall in the setting change process. Each time the clear switch is operated, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, updated every time the clear switch is operated, such as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 →...). The setting value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20E, the CPU 103 turns off the display monitor 150IW029 based on the fact that the setting key 150IW051 has been turned off by an operation of a game hall clerk or the like, thereby turning off the game arcade. The clerk or the like is notified that the new set value has been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. In addition, when the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20A (timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory about the big hit is erased, the big winning opening remains closed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process, and enters a state in which a game can be played, that is, a state in which a variation display result, a jackpot type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

  Note that, in the setting change processing in the feature unit 150IW, a form in which the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 in the setting change process is not performed as a setting value that is the most unfavorable for the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 150IW) or the most advantageous for the player. The set value ("3" in the case of the present feature unit 150IW) may be displayed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20-12, the case where the set value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor 150IW029 when the set value is confirmed or changed is described. For example, the setting value may be displayed using the second and subsequent displays on the display monitor 150IW029. Further, for example, the display monitor 150IW029 may be configured to display the set value by performing a dedicated 4-digit display. In this case, for example, if the set value is “1”, a 4-digit display of “−S−1” is performed on the display monitor 150IW029, and if the set value is “2”, “−S−2” is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029. May be displayed, or if the set value is "3", the display monitor 150IW029 may display the four digits "-S-3". Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed on all four-digit displays of the display monitor 150IW029. For example, if the set value is “1”, four digits of “1111” are displayed on the display monitor 150IW029, and if the set value is “2”, four digits of “2222” are displayed on the display monitor 150IW029. You may.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the feature section 150IW will be described. FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total number of reserved storages (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) (step 150IWS101). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

  If the total number of reserved storages is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second number of reserved storages is 0 (step 150 IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is 0. If the second reserved number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to indicate "second" (step 150 IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 150 IWS 104).

  By performing the processing of steps 150IWS102 to S104, in the present feature unit 150IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuated and displayed in accordance with the starting winning order in which the game balls have won the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port. May be executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 150 IWS 105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 sets each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in a random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by one, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 150 IWS 106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by one and sets the value of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by one, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 stores the first reserved storage buffer in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4). Each of the stored random numbers is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each of the numbers stored in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved number of storage = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers (or the respective second reserved storage numbers) are always the first reserved storage number (or (The number of second reserved storages) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by one (step 150 IWS107). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (Step 150 IWS 108). In the feature section 112, as described above, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change processing is executed at the time of power-on by executing the processing of step 150 IWS047. A set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of the 150 IWS 108.

  In this example, the same setting value command is transmitted when the setting value command is transmitted in step 150IWS047 and when the setting value command is transmitted in step 150IWS108. You may comprise so that a command may be transmitted. For example, in step 150IWS047, a command for directly specifying a setting value (for example, commands 9E01 (H) to 9E03 (H) according to the setting values “1” to “3”) is transmitted, while in step 150IWS108, the setting value is transmitted. A configuration may be adopted in which a specifiable variation pattern command is transmitted and the variation pattern commands are prepared for the number of set values (for example, a command 1C00 (H) 〜 is prepared as a variation pattern command for the set value “1”). The command 2C00 (H) Ｈ is prepared as a variation pattern command for the set value “2”, and the command 3C00 (H) 〜 is prepared as a variation pattern command for the set value “3”.

  In addition, in the case of the above configuration, even when the same variation pattern is used, if a different variation pattern command is transmitted for each set value, the total number of variation patterns × the number of set values (3 in this example). ) Requires a variation pattern command, and the data capacity may be increased. Therefore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a set value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only variation pattern commands corresponding to the specific variation pattern are provided with variation pattern commands for the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation has the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the number of the setting values. May be provided.

  Also, in this example, the same setting value command is transmitted as the setting value command transmitted when the power is turned on (see step 150 IWS047) and the setting value command transmitted when the fluctuation starts (see step 150 IWS108). The embodiment is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure the set value command for power-on and the set value command for start of change as separate commands, and to send different set value commands at power-on and at start of change. Good.

  Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation is shown. However, it is configured to transmit the effect control command which combines the fluctuation pattern command and the set value command. Is also good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted when the set value is “1”, and when the variation value is “2”, The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and when the set value is “3”, the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

  In addition, the microcomputer 100 for game control is configured to be able to output the same variation pattern command (for example, variation pattern command A) irrespective of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 side determines which set value it is. Any of the variation patterns may be selected and the selection ratio may be different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is increased. The selection may be made at a ratio, or if the set value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high ratio. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 have the same variation time, but may be configured so that the presence / absence of a pseudo run, the number of pseudo runs, the presence / absence of reach, and the type are different. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is selected uniformly, or when the set value command is not normally received, a dedicated selection ratio is used. May be used to select a variation pattern.

  Further, in the present example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the change has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the change.

  In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current game state (step 150 IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probable change state background designation command when in the probable change state, and performs control to transmit a time reduction state background designation command when in the time reduction state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control for transmitting the normal state background designation command is performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or a small hit determination value (see FIG. 20-4) with the random number value MR1, and if they match, determines a big hit or a small hit. The program to execute. In other words, it is a program for executing the processing of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in Step 150IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (Step 150IWS111). If it is determined that the small hit is made (Y in step 150 IWS 111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step 150 IWS 112), and proceeds to step 150 IWS 116.

  If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value (N in step 150IWS111), that is, if it is out of the range, the process directly proceeds to step 150IWS116.

  If the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 150 IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 20-5) to match the type corresponding to the value of the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A”). , "Big hit type B" or "big hit type C") is determined as the big hit type (step 150 IWS114).

  Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 150 IWS 115). For example, when the big hit type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data showing the big hit type. When the big hit type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (step 150 IWS116). For example, if neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag has been set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is determined to be a special symbol stop symbol. For example, when the big hit flag is set, the big hit symbol “7” is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, a different special symbol may be determined as a stop symbol depending on the big hit type. For example, when the small hit flag is set, a small hit symbol “5” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (Step S111) (Step 150IWS117).

(Direction mode change processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the present feature unit 150IW will be described. FIG. 20-15 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the effect control main process in the characteristic unit 150IW. In the present feature unit 150IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control random number update process of step S77, it executes an effect mode change process of changing the effect mode (step 150IWS201). The process returns to step S73.

  In the present characteristic portion 150IW, it is possible to control three types of effect modes, that is, effect mode A to effect mode C. For example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled, The types of characters that appear in the notice production and the reach production are different. In the effect mode change processing of step 150 IWS 201, when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied, effect control CPU 120 performs control for changing the current effect mode to a different effect mode. For example, when a real-time clock is mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect mode may be changed based on the fact that a predetermined date or time has been reached based on the date and time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

  In step 150IW201, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode, for example, a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change may be set, and a flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the effect mode A, the effect mode A flag may be set, and the effect mode B flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the mode is changed to the effect mode B, the effect mode B flag may be set, and the effect mode A flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the mode is changed to the effect mode C, the effect mode C flag may be set, and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

  The way of changing the production mode may be such that the production mode is changed in a predetermined order such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A →. The mode may be randomly changed from the modes A to C.

(Command analysis processing)

  FIG. 20-16 and FIG. 20-17 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis processing (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command receiving buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a received command is stored in the command receiving buffer (step 150 IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step 150IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 150 IWS303). The reason for adding +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 150 IWS 304), effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in a set value storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 150). 150 IWS 305). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once since the power of the gaming machine was turned on (step 150IWS306).

  In the feature section 150IW, since the power of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area indicate the power supply to the gaming machine. Cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, and the process is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. You. Since the effect control board 12 is started in a state where the set value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when executing the setting confirmation processing or the recovery processing. The configuration may be such that the set value command is always transmitted when the power is turned on.

  Also, in the present characteristic unit 150IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting change processing is performed. However, the setting value command is not normally transmitted due to a missing command or garbled data. Is not received, the process of step 150 IWS 305 is not executed, and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in the present feature unit 150IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each variable display. Therefore, the processing of step 150IWS 305 is performed based on the received set value command thereafter. The setting value is executed, and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

  Also, even if the set value command is received, the set value command included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. You may comprise so that it may determine whether the included set value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the set value is configured to be set to any value of “1” to “3”, but includes a value that should not be set, such as “5” or “10”. In such a case, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and thereafter, when a new set value command is received, the new set value command is used. When the indicated set value does not match the previously stored set value, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and that it is determined to be abnormal. Then, even when it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is determined that the set value command has not been normally received, and the effect is limited according to the processing method indicated by the present feature unit 150IW. May be configured.

(Initial appearance setting)
In the feature control unit 150IW, when either one of the initialization designation command and the restoration command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis processing on the effect control board 12 side, the predetermined initial appearance (Specifically, a combination of decorative symbols which are displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) is controlled (hereinafter, also referred to as an initial appearance effect).

  If the received effect control command is an initialization designation command or a command at the time of restoration (step 150IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS308). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the setting value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value, the initial appearance determination table is used to determine the combination of an even initial appearance (for example, “246” or “224”), which is a combination of even ornaments, and an odd number of ornaments. It is determined to be either an odd initial number (for example, “135” or “113”) or a special initial number that is a combination of decorative symbols including a special symbol (eg, a star symbol) (step 150IWS309). . Then, control goes to a step 150 IWS 314.

  FIG. 20-18 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the initial appearance determination table. In step 150 IWS 309, a lottery process based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the judgment values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area, using the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. Determine the result. In the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 20-18 (A), the odd number initial appearance is higher in the order of setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the start of the game, if the odd initial number is displayed, the setting has been changed, and the set value which is advantageous compared to the case where the even initial number is displayed. It will be suggested that it is set to. Also, as shown in FIG. 20-18 (A), a special initial roll may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, if a special initial roll is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be of interest, and a motivation to play the game can be given from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, thereby increasing interest.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change processing is executed, but the setting value command cannot be normally received due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the production control is performed. CPU 120 for use checks whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 150 IWS 310). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the initial value is to be set using the initial value determination table shown in FIG. 20-18 (A) assuming that the setting value is “1” (step 150IWS311). ). Then, control goes to a step 150 IWS 314.

  By executing the processing of steps 150 IWS 310 to S 311, in the present feature unit 150 IW, if the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode A is set, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting is set. The initial roll is determined to be "1". As shown in FIG. 20-18 (A), for the set value “1”, the odds of being determined to be the odd initial roll are the lowest, and the special initial roll is not determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which odd initial numbers or special initial numbers are displayed and the player is discouraged from being discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set. In order to prevent a decline.

  If it is not effect mode A, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode C (step 150 IWS 312). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines an initial outcome using the initial effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS313). Then, control goes to a step 150 IWS 314.

  FIG. 20-18 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial appearance determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-18 (B), in the initial appearance determination table for effect mode C, an odd initial appearance is determined as compared with the case where the setting value “3” is most advantageous for the player. The ratio is low, and there is no case where a special initial roll is determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 150 IWS 312 to S 313, in the present feature unit 150 IW, an unfavorable set value is set when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. In spite of this, odd initial numbers and special initial numbers are displayed to reduce a situation in which the player is discouraged and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial outcome determined in steps 150 IWS 309, S 311, and S 313 (step 150 IWS 314).

  On the other hand, when the effect mode is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial effect as an even initial effect, and the image display device 5. In, control for displaying even-numbered initial rolls is performed (step 150 IWS 315).

  By executing the processing of step 150 IWS 315, in the present feature unit 150 IW, even if the set value command has not been normally received and the effect mode is B, the even numbered initial result is displayed uniformly. Thereby, even if an unfavorable setting value is set, it is possible to reduce a situation in which an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed and the player is discouraged, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented. I have to.

  Even if the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, the odd numbered initial appearance symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, using the table in which the determination ratio of the odd initial appearance symbols is set lower overall than the set value “1” of the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that an eye symbol may be determined.

  In this example, the case where the set value command was not normally received and the effect mode B is displayed, and the case where the even-numbered initial roll is uniformly displayed is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. . For example, when the set value command was not normally received and the set value command was not normally received, such as a combination of symbols "???" It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Any combination of symbols that do not suggest setting values at all in such a form may be displayed as an initial appearance.

  Further, the processing when the set value command is not normally received (or when the set value is not properly stored) is not limited to the processing shown in this example. For example, when it is determined as N in step 150 IWS 308, the setting value “1” may be stored in the setting value storage area as a default to determine an initial outcome. Also, for example, a configuration is adopted in which a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value “4”) indicating that the setting value command was not normally received is stored in the setting value storage area, and the initial appearance is determined. Is also good.

  If the received effect control command is a set value abnormal error command (step 150 IWS 316), effect control CPU 120 executes a set value abnormal error notification (step 150 IWS 317). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as “A setting value error has occurred” on the image display device 5, or sounds a sound or error sound indicating a setting value error from the speakers 8 L and 8 R. The output is controlled, and the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are caused to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the set value abnormality error is notified, a sound or error sound of the maximum volume is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are illuminated at the maximum luminance (for example, a full-color LED). In this case, it is desirable to emit white light.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command specifying a variation pattern) (step 150 IWS320), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command formed in the RAM. It is stored in the area (step 150 IWS 321). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 150 IWS 322).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (an effect control command for specifying whether to make a big hit or a small hit, a big hit type, and a small hit type) (step 150IWS323), the effect control command CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step 150 IWS 324).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designating command (an effect control command designating that a stop symbol of a decorative symbol is to be confirmed and displayed) (step 150IWS325), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag (step 150IWS325). Step 150 IWS 326).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (effect control command designating the start of a jackpot game) (step 150IWS327), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 150IWS328).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot game) (step 150WS 329), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 150IWS330).

  If the received effect control command is any other command, effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 150IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 150 IWS301.

  It should be noted that, in the present characteristic unit 150IW, if the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, the odd initial roll is not displayed. However, the odd initial roll may be displayed. Good. Also in this case, the ratio determined for the odd initial appearance may be different depending on the setting value (that is, the setting value may be suggested).

  In addition, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd initial number and the even initial number, an initial number that denies the possibility of a specific set value (for example, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied, and A value 2 or a set value 3 is determined), or an initial roll that determines a specific set value may be provided, and displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, by not determining the specific initial roll, when the specific initial roll is displayed, the possibility of the setting value 1 is denied and the setting value 2 or It is determined that the setting value is 3. In addition, for example, by determining a specific initial roll only in the case of the setting value 3, when the specific initial roll is displayed, the setting value 3 is determined. . Further, at the time of determining the initial outcome, any one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion effect)
In the present characteristic unit 150IW, the set value is configured to be changeable, and as a set suggestive effect suggesting the set value, a pre-game suggestive effect executed before the start of the game, the above-described initial effect, and during the game (for example, , A suggestion effect during a game executed during the change display of the decorative symbol), a setting suggestion based on the tendency to determine the change pattern described above, and a suggestion effect during the big hit executed during the big hit (for example, during the big hit game). Have been. In addition, in the present feature unit 150IW, a suggestion effect before a game, a suggestion effect during a game, and a suggestion effect during a big hit can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes each having a different reliability of the suggestion. The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of the suggestion may be made higher in the order of the pre-game suggestion effect> the big hit suggestion effect> the game suggestion effect, or the pre-game suggestion effect> the game suggestion effect> the big hit suggestion effect, The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect before the game, or the order of the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect before the game. The execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be settable. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute all or some of the setting suggestion effects (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect or an initial effect effect indicating that a setting change has been performed), or does not execute the ratio. The setting may be changed so as to lower (or increase). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is performed by operating the operating means such as the push button 31B or the operating means such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine (only the administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Variable display start wait processing)
FIG. 20-19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 150 IWS 501).

  When the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the process if the customer-waiting demonstration effect is being executed (steps 150 IWS 502, 150 IWS 503) and to the image display device 5. The control for terminating the displayed puzzle display is performed (step 150 IWS 504). The puzzle display is started by executing the processing of step 150 IWS 518 described later.

  Then, the variable pattern command reception flag is reset (step 150IWS505), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 150IWS506), and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the timing result by the timing means matches the predetermined condition, unless the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (N in step 150 IWS507). (Step 150 IWS508). In step 150 IWS 508, for example, if the timer (for example, set for 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “losing”) has ended, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Also, when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the fluctuation display has not been performed once and the game is not started), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, when a predetermined period has elapsed without performing the variable display (and when the game has not been controlled to the big hit game state) or before the game has started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by processing described later. Will be executed.

  If the result of the time measurement by the time measurement means matches the predetermined condition, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 (step 150IWS509). That is, in step 150 IWS 509, it is confirmed whether the game has not been started yet.

  If the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150 IWS 510). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control is to be performed based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence / absence of the pre-game suggestion effect is determined according to the set value, and the effect mode of execution is determined (step 150IWS511). Then, control goes to a step 150 IWS 516.

  In the present feature unit 150IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer demonstration demonstration including the aspect is performed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

  FIG. 20-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 150IWS511, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-20 (A), a lottery process based on a random number is performed in accordance with the allocation of the determination value corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area. The presence / absence of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 20-20 (A), determination values are assigned in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3” so that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate. Have been. Also, the determination values are assigned such that the ratio determined in the second effect mode increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed, and that it is set to an advantageous set value by being executed in the second effect mode rather than in the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 20A, the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change processing is executed, but the setting value command cannot be normally received due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the production control is performed. CPU 120 for use checks whether or not the current production mode is production mode A (step 150 IWS512). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is to be executed by using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. And the effect form is determined (step 150 IWS513). Then, control goes to a step 150 IWS 516.

  By executing the processing of steps 150 IWS 512 to S 513, in the present feature unit 150 IW, if the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode A is set, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting is set. The presence / absence of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as “1”. As shown in FIG. 20A, for the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and the third effect mode is not determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  If it is not effect mode A, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode C (step 150 IWS 514). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS515). Then, control goes to a step 150 IWS 516.

  FIG. 20B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-20 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, it is determined that the pre-game suggestion effect is to be executed, as compared with the case where the setting value is “2” or “3”. Ratio itself is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode is not determined.

  By executing the processes of steps 150 IWS 514 to S 515, in the present feature unit 150 IW, an unfavorable set value is set when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode is C. Despite this, the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Then, effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute a customer waiting demonstration effect in a mode including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 150 IWS 511, S 513, and S 515 (step 150 IWS 516). Then, control goes to a step 150 IWS 518.

  On the other hand, when the effect mode is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 150 IWS 517. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect.

  By performing the processing of step 150IWS514, the present feature unit 150IW does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect by not executing the pre-game suggestion effect when the set value command has not been normally received and the effect mode is the effect mode B. Even if an unfavorable setting value is set, a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the player is discouraged is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Even if the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, a pre-game suggestion effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestion effect is set lower overall than the set value “1” of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that presence or absence and a kind of suggestion effect may be determined.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example illustrated in FIGS. 20 to 20 (A), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of the plurality of effect modes may have a different execution ratio depending on the set value. It may be.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of the plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) to be not determined, the setting is performed when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed. The possibility of value 1 is denied, and it is determined that the value is set value 2 or set value 3. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, a specific set value may be determined. For example, only in the case of the setting value 3, by making it determined to a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode), when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In the present characteristic unit 150IW, it is possible to execute a pre-game suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value, but this is based on the pre-game suggestion effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode) according to the set value. (Including three performance modes), the execution ratio of the first performance mode, the second performance mode, and the third performance mode differs depending on the set value, and only the specific performance mode depending on the set value This is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

  Note that, in the present characteristic portion 150IW, the setting is not changed when the power is turned on, and if the set value command has not yet been received, the pre-game suggestion effect is not executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable even when the setting is not changed. In this case, the presence / absence of the pre-game suggestion effect may be determined at a different ratio between when the setting change is performed and when the setting change is not performed, and the effect mode when the effect is performed may be determined.

  For example, FIG. 20-20 (C) is a pre-game suggestive effect determination table used when a command at the time of restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-20 (A) with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-20 (C), when a command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change When not performed, the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed is lower than when the setting change is performed, and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is smaller. By doing so, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect can be made different between when the setting change is performed and when the setting change is not performed.

  If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control for executing a customer waiting demonstration effect including execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 150IWS517). Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process ends.

  When the processing of step 150 IWS 517 is executed, for example, on the image display device 5, an execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (the suggestion effect during a game or the suggestion effect during a big hit), the execution content (the effect mode at the time of execution), and the like. A customer waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 150 IWS 517 is executed, a customer waiting demonstration is performed. When a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration, The image display device 5 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of executions and the content of the setting suggestion effect (initial effect effect, suggestion effect before game, suggestion effect during game, suggestion effect during big hit, etc.) (effect mode at the time of execution) are shown. Information may be stored, and an effect of estimating a setting value from the information and notifying the setting value may be made executable. Note that this effect is to notify a setting expectation degree (or an estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined criterion from the execution state of the setting suggestive effect, and not to notify an actual setting value. .

  In the feature section 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 150IWS509 to 150IWS516. Also, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is displayed during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the processing of step 150 IWS 517, but the information regarding the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, to give a motivation to play the game from an early time slot of the business hours of the game store, and to enhance interest. . The present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 150IW. For example, using a real-time clock or the like, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time period (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). Is also good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include information on the game suggestion effect during the special period.

  In addition to the configuration of the feature section 150IW, the number of executions and execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 when the game is over. May be configured. In addition, when a player uses a portable terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph a two-dimensional code displayed on a gaming machine and transmits the photographed image to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server performs processing based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the execution history information may be acquired by the player accessing the Web server using the portable terminal (or analyzing the two-dimensional code), and may be displayed on the display device provided in the portable terminal. Further, the setting suggestion image indicating the setting value may be displayed on the display device provided in the portable terminal by reading the two-dimensional code including the execution history information using the portable terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined criterion is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image indicating the calculated setting value (only an estimation and different from an actual setting value) is displayed. You may.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs control to start display of puzzle display on image display device 5 based on the values of the first to third piece counters (step 150IWS 518).

  In the present example, a puzzle effect in which pieces of jigsaw puzzles are gradually arranged may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. When the puzzle effect is executed, each time the puzzle effect is executed once, an effect is executed in which any one of the puzzles 1 to 3 is arranged one by one. Then, after a plurality of puzzle effects have been executed, it is suggested that the set value is "1" when puzzle 1 is finally completed with all the pieces, and is set when puzzle 2 is completed with all the pieces. It is suggested that the value is "2", and that when the puzzle 3 is completed with all the pieces, the value is "3".

  Also, in this example, the puzzle is not always displayed in the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern every time, but only the fluctuating display determined to execute the puzzle effect (that is, the fluctuating display in which one of the puzzle pieces increases) Only) puzzles are displayed. On the other hand, if the decoration display is not displayed and the waiting-for-customer demonstration display is being displayed, the processing of step 150 IWS 518 is executed, whereby the puzzle display is displayed on the image display device 5, and the puzzle 1 is displayed. 3 can be checked for the state of gathering of the pieces.

  The first piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces gathered in puzzle 1. The second piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces gathered in puzzle 2. The third piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces gathered in puzzle 3. In this example, since the power of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up, the value of the first to third piece counters stored in the RAM 122 is not supplied to the gaming machine. It is assumed that when the game machine is cleared and the game machine is powered on, the state of the first to third piece counters is 0.

  In step 150 IWS 518, an image of puzzle 1 in which the number of pieces corresponding to the value of the first piece counter are displayed, and an image of puzzle 2 in which the number of pieces corresponding to the value of the second piece counter are displayed, A puzzle display is displayed by displaying an image of puzzle 3 in which a number of pieces corresponding to the value of the third piece counter are gathered.

(Variable display start setting processing)
FIG. 20-21 is a flowchart illustrating the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 150IWS601). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read in step 150 IWS 601 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). Symbols (step 150 IWS 602). That is, when the processing of step 150 IWS 602 is executed by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) is determined according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. (A symbol) is realized. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 150 IWS 602, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a big hit is based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on only the variation pattern command. .

  In step 150 IWS 602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probable big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols as stop symbols. Also, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal big hit (non-probable big hit), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same even symbols as stop symbols. I do.

  If the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols of the small hit symbol according to the small hit type specified by the display result designation command. . In this example, the combination of “135” is determined as the small hit symbol when the small hit type is A, and the combination of “357” is determined as the small hit symbol when the small hit type is B. When the type is C, a combination of “579” is determined as the small hit symbol.

  If the received display result designation command indicates a loss, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of two decorative symbols on the left and right is determined.

  If the pseudo-run is specified by the fluctuation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 150 IWS602 that the temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-run is a chance symbol (for example, “223” or “445”). , But a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol which is not one of the reach but is shifted by one symbol) is also determined.

  The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of the decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, a stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the number-of-variations counter for counting the number of times of execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol since the power of the gaming machine was turned on (step 150IWS603). In this example, since the power of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up, the value of the variation counter stored in the RAM 122 is cleared when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. It is assumed that when the power of the machine is turned on, the state of the value of the fluctuation counter is 0.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the in-game suggestive effect determination process of determining the presence / absence of the in-game suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS604).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 executes a puzzle effect setting process for setting the presence / absence of a puzzle effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS605).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the suggestion effect during game or the puzzle effect if the variation pattern and the execution of the suggestion effect during game or the puzzle effect are determined (step 150IWS606). . Then, effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 150 IWS 607).

  The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (effect components) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is configured by data in which a plurality of combinations of a process timer set value, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data describes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variable time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In the process timer set value, a variation time in the variation mode is set. The effect control CPU 120 performs control to refer to the process table and display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. The process table is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12. Further, a process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

  In the process table used when performing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. Instead of setting the symbol to be stop-displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-run or the temporary stop symbol in the slide effect. You may.

  When the execution of the game suggestion effect is determined in the game suggestion effect determination process of step 150 IWS 604, a process table including the game suggestion effect is selected in step 150 IWS 606, and step 150 IWS 608 is performed in accordance with the selected process table. By performing the variable display effect process (step S172), the in-game suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  When the execution of the puzzle effect is determined in the puzzle effect setting process of step 150 IWS 605, a process table including the puzzle effect is selected in step 150 IWS 606, and the step 150 IWS 608 and the variable display effect process are performed according to the selected process table. By executing (step S172), a puzzle effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (the image display device 5 as effect component, the effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control of the various lamps and the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts is executed (step 150IWS608).

  In the characteristic section 150IW, the effect control CPU 120 performs control such that a decorative pattern is variably displayed by a variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command on a one-to-one basis. May be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 150IWS609). Then, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 150 IWS 610), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(During game suggestion effect determination processing)
FIG. 20-22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the in-game suggestion effect determination process (step 150 IWS 604). The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the game suggestion effect determination process, if the effect control CPU 120 is in the special period (Y in step 150IWS701), the first game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 150IWS702), and it is not during the special period. In this case (N in Step 150IWS701), the second in-game suggestive effect determination table is selected (Step 150IWS703). For example, a special period flag is set when a setting change end command or a set value command is received, and the special period flag is reset when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it is possible to check in step 150 IWS 701 whether or not the special period is in progress.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150 IWS 704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control is to be performed based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the selected during-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence / absence of execution of the during-game suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined (step 150IWS705).

  FIG. 20-23 (A) is an explanatory view showing a first in-game suggestive effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 20-23 (B) is a second in-game suggestive effect used in the non-special period. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a determination table.

  In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. The judgment value is assigned so that the rate of the judgment is high. With such a configuration, execution of the in-game suggestion effect indicates that it is set to an advantageous set value.

  Further, in the second effect mode (mini-characters A and B appear), the rate of execution of the set value “1” <“2” <“3” is high, and the first effect mode (mini-character A appears). The determination value is assigned such that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values becomes larger than the set value. In other words, the second effect mode has a high degree of reliability for being set to a more advantageous set value than the first effect mode.

  Also, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20A and 23B, the in-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode having high reliability is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to motivate a player to play a game during a special period, and to enhance interest.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B), the third effect mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the set value is “3”.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change processing is executed, but the setting value command cannot be normally received due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the production control is performed. CPU 120 for use checks whether or not the current production mode is production mode A (step 150 IWS 706). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 150 IWS707).

  By executing the processing of steps 150 IWS 706 to S 707, in the present feature unit 150 IW, if the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode A is set, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting is set. The presence or absence of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as “1”. As shown in FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the ratio itself determined to execute the in-game suggestion effect is low and the ratio determined to be the second effect mode Is the lowest, and there is no case where the third effect mode is determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the suggested effect during the game is executed in the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous setting value being set. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS708). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and to determine the effect mode (step 150IWS709).

  FIG. 20C is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the in-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-23 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the ratio of determining to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of setting value “3”. There is no case where the third effect mode is determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 150 IWS 708 to S 709, in the feature section 150 IW, if the set value command has not been normally received and the effect mode is C, an unfavorable set value is set. In spite of the fact, the situation where the suggested effect during the game is executed in the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged is reduced, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

  On the other hand, when the effect mode is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted not to execute the in-game suggestion effect.

  By performing the process of step 150IWS708, the present feature unit 150IW does not execute the in-game suggestion effect by not executing the setting effect command when the set value command has not been normally received and in the effect mode B. Even if an unfavorable setting value is set, a situation in which a suggestion effect during a game is executed and the player is discouraged is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  In addition, even if the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, it may be configured to be able to execute the in-game suggestion effect at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the game suggestion effect is set lower overall than the set value “1” of the game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B) is used. Thus, the presence / absence and type of the suggested effect during the game may be determined.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B), and is executed according to the set value only in a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes. The ratios may be different.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of the plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) to be not determined, the setting is performed when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed. The possibility of value 1 is denied, and it is determined that the value is set value 2 or set value 3. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, a specific set value may be determined. For example, only in the case of the setting value 3, by making it determined to a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode), when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In the present characteristic portion 150IW, it is possible to execute the in-game suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value. However, this is the in-game suggestion effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode) in accordance with the set value. (Including three performance modes), the execution ratio of the first performance mode, the second performance mode, and the third performance mode differs depending on the set value, and only the specific performance mode depending on the set value This is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

  In addition, the present feature unit 150IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect during a game in a common mode (for example, the first performance mode) between the special period and the non-special period, but is not limited to such a configuration. Alternatively, it may be possible to execute a suggestion effect during game in a different mode. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

  In addition, the present feature unit 150IW is configured such that the presence / absence of execution of the suggestion effect during the game and the effect mode in the case of execution are different depending on whether the period is the special period or the non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of the reach effect, the type of the reach effect, the presence or absence of the pseudo continuous effect, the type of the pseudo continuous effect, and the display result are a big hit. Depending on whether or not it is performed, the presence / absence of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution may be different.

  For example, the suggestion effect during the game may be made executable only at least when the fluctuation pattern includes the reach effect (that is, the fluctuation time is longer than the non-reach change pattern). In addition, for example, in the variation pattern including Super Reach B and the variation pattern including Super Reach A having a higher degree of expectation than Super Reach B, the latter is such that the ratio at which the suggestion effect during the game is executed is higher. The reliability when the suggested effect during the game is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the suggested effect during the game is executed increases, and the reliability when the effect is executed is increased. You may make it high.

  Also, for example, in the variation pattern including the pseudo continuous production and the fluctuation pattern not including the pseudo continuous production (or the number of pseudo consecutive productions is smaller than the former), the former has a higher ratio of executing the in-game suggestion production. May be increased, the reliability when the suggested effect during the game is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the suggested effect during the game is executed increases, and when the effect is executed. The reliability may be increased.

  In addition, for example, in a variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and a variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect during the game, The reliability when the medium suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestion effect is executed may increase, and the reliability when the game suggestion effect is executed may increase. .

(Puzzle effect setting processing)
FIGS. 20-24 and 20-25 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the puzzle effect setting process (step 150 IWS605). In the puzzle effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether a puzzle completion flag indicating that any one of puzzles 1 to 3 has been completed is set (step 150IWS801). If the puzzle completion flag is set, the puzzle effect setting process ends.

  By executing the processing of step 150 IWS 801, in this example, a puzzle effect may be performed from when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until one of puzzles 1 to 3 is completed. When one of the puzzles is completed, no puzzle effect is executed thereafter (that is, control is performed so that only one puzzle is completed and two or more puzzles are not completed).

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured so that two or more puzzles may be completed.

  If the puzzle completion flag is not set, effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using a puzzle effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute a puzzle effect, and executes a puzzle effect. It is determined whether or not (step 150 IWS802). 20 to 26 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the puzzle effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 20 to 26, in this example, it is determined that a puzzle effect is to be executed with a probability of 1% when performing the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  Generally, in a game store, when a game is continuously performed between the time the game store is opened and the time the game store closes, it is possible to execute a variation display of the decorative symbol up to about 3000 times (however, the game machine) There is a difference depending on the model). In this example, the maximum number of pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 is 5 pieces, respectively, and when any one of puzzles 1 to 3 is completed up to 5 pieces, the puzzle is completed. In this example, the judgment values are assigned so that even puzzles in which all the pieces are not completely aligned are generally easy to be aligned up to 3 to 4 pieces, so that until one of puzzles 1 to 3 is completed Takes approximately 11 to 13 times to perform the puzzle effect, and since the determination ratio of the execution of the puzzle effect is 1%, it takes approximately 1100 to 1300 times to perform the variable display of the decorative symbol. Therefore, in this example, after the game store is opened, it is designed that the completion of any puzzle is approximately in the afternoon. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and the puzzle may be completed in the morning.

  In this example, the case where one kind of puzzle effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 26 is used is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a different puzzle effect determination table may be used in accordance with the setting of the time slot, the number of executions of the variable display, and the game clerk, so that the execution ratio of the puzzle effect may be changed.

  Further, in this example, the case where the maximum number of pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 is 5 pieces is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, 3 pieces or 4 pieces, or 6 pieces or more. Or, it may be configured to be. Also, the maximum number of pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 does not necessarily need to be the same number, for example, the maximum number of pieces of puzzle 1 is 4 pieces, while the maximum number of pieces of puzzle 3 is 5 pieces. The maximum number of pieces may be different for each puzzle.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute a puzzle effect (step 150IWS803). If it is determined not to execute the puzzle effect, the puzzle effect setting process ends. If it is determined that the puzzle effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the variation counter is 1000 or less (step 150IWS804). If the value of the number-of-variations counter is 1000 or less (that is, if the number of times of execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol since the power of the gaming machine is 1000 or less), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect of the puzzle effect. As a table for determination, a puzzle effect mode determination table A is selected (step 150IWS805).

  If the value of the change number counter is not less than 1000 (that is, if the number of times of execution of the change display of the decorative symbol since the power of the gaming machine is more than 1000), the effect control CPU 120 stores the value in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 It is determined whether or not the set value that has been set is “1” (step 150 IWS 806). If the setting value is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 selects the puzzle effect mode determination table B as a table for determining the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS807).

  If the set value is not “1”, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 is the set value “2” (step 150IWS808). If the setting value is "2", the effect control CPU 120 selects the puzzle effect mode determination table C as a table for determining the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS809).

  If it is not the set value “2” (ie, if the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 is the set value “3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the puzzle effect. As a table, a puzzle effect mode determination table D is selected (step 150 IWS810).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the puzzle effect mode determination table selected in steps 150IWS805, S807, S809, and S810, and determines an effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS811).

  20 to 27 are explanatory diagrams illustrating specific examples of the puzzle effect mode determination table. 20A to 27A show a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table A selected in step 150 IWS805. FIG. 20-27 (B) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table B selected in step 150 IWS807. FIG. 20-27 (C) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table C selected in step 150 IWS809. FIG. 20-27 (D) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table D selected in step 150 IWS810.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 to 27, in each of the puzzle effect mode determination tables A to D, as the effect mode (type) of the puzzle effect, the judgment value is set for each of puzzle effect 1, puzzle effect 2 and puzzle effect 3. Is allocated. Puzzle effect 1 is a puzzle effect performed in a mode in which the number of pieces of puzzle 1 among puzzles 1 to 3 increases by one. Puzzle effect 2 is a puzzle effect performed in a mode in which the number of pieces of puzzle 2 among puzzles 1 to 3 is increased by one. Puzzle effect 3 is a puzzle effect performed in a mode in which the number of pieces of puzzle 3 among puzzles 1 to 3 is increased by one.

  As shown in FIG. 20-27 (A), in puzzle effect mode determination table A, the determination ratio of puzzle effect 3 is higher by 2 to 3% than the determination ratio of other puzzle effects 1 and 2. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the rate at which the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 is increased by one is slightly higher until the display of the decoration symbol is changed 1000 times. Therefore, in the present example, for example, even if the set value is the set value “1” having a low advantage, the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 having a high advantage is up to a predetermined number (for example, 3 to 4). Are easy to get together.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (B), in the puzzle effect mode determination table B, the determination ratio of puzzle effect 1 is 1% higher than the determination ratio of the other puzzle effects 2 and 3. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the display of the fancy symbols is changed 1000 times, and if the set value is set to “1”, the puzzle effect 1 is executed and the puzzle effect 1 is executed. The rate at which one piece increases by one is slightly higher.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (C), in the puzzle effect mode determination table C, the determination ratio of puzzle effect 2 is 1% higher than the determination ratio of the other puzzle effects 1 and 3. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the display of the fancy symbol is changed 1000 times, and if the set value is “2”, the puzzle effect 2 is executed and the puzzle effect 2 is executed. The rate at which the second piece increases by one is slightly higher.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (D), in the puzzle effect mode determination table D, the determination ratio of puzzle effect 3 is 1% higher than the determination ratio of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the display of the decoration symbol is changed 1000 times, and if the set value is set to “3”, the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the puzzle effect 3 is executed. The rate at which the number 3 piece increases by one is slightly higher.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 20 to 27, in any of the puzzle effect mode determination tables A to D, the execution ratio of any of the puzzle effects 1 to 3 is at most 1 to 3 compared to the other puzzle effects. %, It is easy for all the pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 to gather to some extent, and finally puzzles other than puzzles in which the maximum number of pieces (5 pieces in this example) among puzzles 1 to 3 are completed. However, at least 3 to 4 pieces are configured to be easily aligned.

  Note that the configuration of the puzzle effect mode determination table is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, it is configured to determine the presentation mode of the puzzle presentation using a different puzzle presentation mode determination table according to the setting of the game clerk, so that the selection ratio of the presentation mode of the puzzle presentation can be changed. You may. For example, the puzzles 1 to 3 may be arranged such that pieces are evenly distributed to some extent, or a specific puzzle may be arranged such that pieces are more easily aligned than other puzzles or may be changed.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not puzzle effect 1 has been determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150 IWS 812). If the puzzle effect 1 has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 is the set value “1” (step 150IWS813). If the set value is “1”, the process directly proceeds to step 150 IWS815.

  If the set value is not "1", the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the first piece counter is 4 (step 150WS 814). If the value of the first piece counter is 4, the flow shifts to step 150 IWS 819 without shifting to the processing of steps 150 IWS 815 to S 818. That is, in this case, the fact that the value of the first piece counter is 4 means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 1 are gathered, and when the puzzle effect 1 is executed, the fifth piece is aligned and the puzzle 1 is completed. Although it is completed, since the set value set is not “1” and the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set value, steps 150 IWS 815 to 150 The processing is not shifted to S818, and the execution of the puzzle effect is canceled.

  If the set value is "1" (Y in step 150IWS813) or if the value of the first piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS814), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the puzzle effect 1 is to be executed. A puzzle effect 1 execution flag is set (step 150 IWS815). In this example, at step 150 IWS 606 of the variable display start setting process, a process table including puzzle effect 1 is selected based on the fact that the puzzle effect 1 execution flag is set, and step 150 is performed according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS 608 and the variable display effect processing (step S172), the puzzle effect 1 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. It is assumed that the puzzle effect 1 execution flag is reset when the variation display of the decorative symbol is ended.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the first piece counter (step 150IWS816), and checks whether or not the value of the first piece counter after the addition is 5 (step 150IWS817). If the value of the first piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 120 sets a puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS818).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not puzzle effect 2 has been determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS819). If the puzzle effect 2 has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 is the set value “2” (step 150IWS820). If the setting value is “2”, the process directly proceeds to step 150 IWS822.

  If the set value is not "2", the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the second piece counter is 4 (step 150WS 821). If the value of the second piece counter is 4, the flow shifts to step 150 IWS 826 without shifting to the processing of steps 150 IWS 822 to S 825. That is, in this case, the value of the second piece counter being 4 means that up to four pieces of puzzle 2 are gathered, and when performing the puzzle effect 2, the fifth piece is aligned and puzzle 2 is completed. Although it is completed, since the set value set is not “2” and the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set value, the steps 150 IWS 822 to 150 IWS 822 are completed. It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the process of S825.

  When the set value is “2” (Y in step 150 IWS 820) or when the value of the second piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150 IWS 821), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the puzzle effect 2 is to be executed. A puzzle effect 2 execution flag is set (step 150 IWS82). In this example, at step 150 IWS 606 of the variable display start setting process, a process table including puzzle effect 2 is selected based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 execution flag is set, and step 150 is performed according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS608 and the variable display effect process (step S172), the puzzle effect 2 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. It is assumed that the puzzle effect 2 execution flag is reset when the variation display of the decorative symbol is ended.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the second piece counter (step 150IWS823), and checks whether or not the value of the second piece counter after the addition is 5 (step 150IWS824). If the value of the second piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 120 sets a puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS825).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not puzzle effect 3 has been determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS826). If the puzzle effect 3 has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 is the set value “3” (step 150IWS827). If the setting value is “3”, the process directly proceeds to step 150 IWS829.

  If the set value is not "3", the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the third piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS828). If the value of the third piece counter is 4, the process proceeds to steps 150 IWS 829 to S832, and the puzzle effect setting process ends. That is, in this case, the fact that the value of the third piece counter is 4 means that up to four pieces of puzzle 3 are gathered. When the puzzle effect 3 is executed, the fifth piece is aligned and puzzle 3 is completed. Although it is completed, since the set value set is not the set value “3” and the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set value, steps 150 IWS 829 to 150 It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the process of S832.

  If the set value is "3" (Y in step 150IWS827) or if the value of the third piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS828), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the puzzle effect 3 is to be executed. A puzzle effect 3 execution flag is set (step 150 IWS829). In this example, at step 150 IWS 606 of the variable display start setting process, a process table including puzzle effect 3 is selected based on the fact that the puzzle effect 3 execution flag is set, and step 150 is performed according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS608 and the variable display effect process (step S172), the puzzle effect 3 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. It is assumed that the puzzle effect 3 execution flag is reset when the variation display of the decorative symbol is ended.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 adds one to the value of the third piece counter (step 150IWS830), and checks whether or not the value of the third piece counter after the addition is 5 (step 150IWS831). If the value of the third piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 120 sets a puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS832).

  In the present example, by executing the processing of steps 150 IWS813, S814, S820, S821, S827, and S828, the setting value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set value. In the case of, the case where the puzzle effect is canceled so that such a situation does not occur is shown, but the processing mode is not limited to such a case. For example, the configuration may be such that the step 150 IWS811 is executed again, and the effect of the puzzle effect is determined again until the effect of the puzzle effect that does not cause such an inconsistent state is determined. In addition, for example, a configuration may be employed in which the effect of the puzzle effect is determined again using a table excluding the effect of the effect of the puzzle that results in such an inconsistent state.

  Further, in this example, the case is shown in which control is performed so that the set value suggested in the completed puzzle and the set value actually set do not coincide with each other. Instead, the set value suggested in the completed puzzle may not always match the set value actually set. For example, when the set value is “3”, the rate of completion of puzzle 3 is highest, but puzzle 1 and puzzle 2 may be completed in some cases.

  Also, regarding the puzzle effect, it is checked whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (whether or not the set value command is normally received). As with the determination of the preceding suggestion effect, the suggestion effect during the game, and the suggestion effect during the big hit, the execution of the puzzle effect may be limited.

(During the jackpot production decision process)
FIG. 20-28 is a flowchart showing an example of a big hit effect determination process. The big hit effect rendering determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit effect determination processing, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS901). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the effect control CPU 120 The presence or absence of the performance during the big hit is determined, and the performance mode of the performance is determined (step 150 IWS902). Then, control goes to a step 150 IWS907.

  In step S150IWS902, if it is a period (hereinafter also referred to as a specific period) from the time when the game is started to the time when the variable display is executed a specific number of times (in this example, 100 times), the first time shown in FIG. The one big hit big suggestion effect determination table is selected, and if it is not during the specific period, the second big hit big suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-29 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence / absence of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, and the effect mode in the case of execution is determined. Note that the “game start time” here refers to the time at which the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this. It may be the time when the display is started, or the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in the characteristic portion 150IW, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (in this example, 100 times) is set as the specific period regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (in this example, 100 times) may be set as the specific period. Also, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and a first specific period (a period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed 50 times) and a second specific period (the 51st fluctuation after the game starts) (A period from the display until the 100th variation display is executed), a jackpot medium suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the medium hit suggestion effect and the determination ratio of the effect mode are different may be used.

  In the first and second big hit middle suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B), the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. The judgment value is assigned so that the rate of the judgment is high. With such a configuration, by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is suggested that the value is set to an advantageous set value.

  In the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the execution ratio in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3” is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period is high. The determination value is assigned so that the difference becomes larger. In other words, in the specific period, a big hit suggestion effect with higher reliability is executed than in the non-specific period. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a specific period, and to enhance interest. The present invention is not limited to the configuration of the feature unit 150IW, and the big hit suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only during a specific period, and may not be executed during a non-specific period.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the big hit suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode, it is determined that the setting value is “3”.

  In the present feature unit 150IW, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (A1), the decorative symbol that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (B1), a dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 150IW102 is displayed.

  Also, when the jackpot suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (A1), after the decorative symbol that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed. As shown in 20-31 (C1), a dialogue D image (“high setting decision”) 150IW105 is displayed.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change processing is executed, but the setting value command cannot be normally received due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the production control is performed. The CPU 120 for use checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode A (step 150 IWS903). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the case of the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the medium hit suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected big hit suggestion effect determination table assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 150 IWS904). Then, control goes to a step 150 IWS907.

  By executing the processing of steps 150 IWS 903 to S 904, in the present feature unit 150 IW, if the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode A is set, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting is set. The presence or absence of the jackpot suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as “1”. As shown in FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second production mode or the third production mode is the lowest, and the fourth production mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the unfavorable setting value being set, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode execute a big hit suggestion effect to discourage the player. The situation is reduced to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS905). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the during the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode by using the during the big hit suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS906). Then, control goes to a step 150 IWS907.

  FIG. 20-29 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the bonus effect suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-29 (C), in the big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio itself of determining to execute the big hit medium suggestion effect is low, and the setting value is “2” or “3”. As compared with the above, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is lower, and the fourth effect mode is not determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 150 IWS 905 to S 906, in the present feature unit 150 IW, an unfavorable setting value is set in the case where the setting value command has not been normally received and in the effect mode C. Despite the fact that the second production mode, the third production mode, and the third production mode perform a jackpot suggestion production, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the player is discouraged, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

  On the other hand, when the effect mode is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 150 IWS907. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  By executing the processing of step 150IWS905, the present feature unit 150IW does not execute the jackpot suggestion effect when the set value command is not normally received and the effect mode is the effect mode B. Even if an unfavorable set value is set, a situation in which a suggestion effect during a big hit is executed and the player is discouraged is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  In addition, even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, a configuration may be such that the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the big hit suggestion effect is set lower than the set value “1” of the big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B) is used. Thus, the presence or absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit may be determined.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B), and is executed according to the set value only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes. The ratios may be different.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 20-29 (A), when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. You may. In this case, the non-execution ratio may be changed according to the set value. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 20-29 (B), the rate at which the jackpot suggestion effect is not executed is the same regardless of the set value, but if the rate at which the effect is not executed is different according to the set value. You may make it do.

  In addition, in the present feature unit 150IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, a big hit middle suggestion effect is configured as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialog image suggesting a setting value is displayed) may be executed based on a predetermined condition being satisfied during a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect has reached the predetermined number, or when a specific super reach effect or a notice effect has been executed.

  In the present feature unit 150IW, it is possible to execute a jackpot medium suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value. However, this is a jackpot medium suggestion effect according to the set value (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect mode). (Including the effect mode and the fourth effect mode), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode differ depending on the set value, the setting value This is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) according to.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the attraction effect (step 150 IWS907).

  Here, for example, it is assumed that the movable member 150IW101 is provided above the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, control is performed such that the movable member 150IW101 moves to the front of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 150IW101 moves to the front of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 performs a big hit suggestion effect. The position where the serif image is displayed becomes difficult to recognize. In the present feature portion 150IW, since the jackpot suggestion effect and the character effect effect are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the jackpot game, the movable member 150IW101 that has actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 has the jackpot. It does not obscure the line image displayed by the middle suggestion effect. However, if the movable member 150IW101 is operated by the accessory effect during the fanfare period, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 150IW101, and the dialog image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect may be overlooked. In view of this, in step 150 IWS907, by using the character effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-29 (D), when the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, the character effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and lowering the interest. Further, with such a configuration, even when the big hit suggestion effect and the character effect effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the big hit suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize.

  When the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the accessory effect is changed (for example, the accessory effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the jackpot suggestion effect is performed. (During the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize. When the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 150IW101 is changed (for example, by controlling not to stop at a position overlapping with the dialog image by the big hit suggestion effect), or The display position of the dialog image by the middle suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined, the execution of the accessory effect may be restricted by reducing the execution ratio of the accessory effect. In addition, the execution of the character effect may be limited only during a specific period. Further, the present invention is not limited to the example illustrated in FIGS. 20-29 (D), and when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate.

  Next, when not performing the accessory effect (N in Step 150IWS908), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a light guide plate effect (Step 150IWS909).

  Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, a light guide plate 150IW103 having a light-transmitting property capable of transmitting light and a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from an end face of the light guide plate are provided. In addition, it is assumed that a reflector is provided which reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 150IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 150IW103 by the light emitting body and emits the light to the front of the gaming machine. Then, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect of emitting light from the reflector provided on the light guide plate 150IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitter to emit light. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (B3), light is emitted from the reflector provided on the light guide plate 150IW103 to the front of the gaming machine, resulting in a "big hit". Character appears. In addition, during execution of the light guide plate effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

  In step 150 IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-29 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at a different ratio according to the presence or absence of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode when executed. You. Specifically, when the suggestion effect during the big hit in the first effect mode is executed, the ratio of the light guide plate effect being executed is high, and during the big hit in the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode. When the effect is performed, the light guide plate effect is configured to be performed at a low rate. In other words, when a large hit suggestion effect of an effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous set value is executed, a light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the large hit suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. I have. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (B4), when the dialogue A image (“setting is...”) 150IW104 is displayed by the suggestion effect during the big hit in the first effect mode, the light guide plate effect is executed. Then, the line A image becomes difficult to recognize. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment due to a suggestion effect during a big hit in an effect mode that is undesirable for the player. In addition, when the big hit suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of one of the big hit suggestion effect and the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The effect may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion effect during the big hit may be performed during the ending period.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect mode of the puzzle effect. FIG. 20-32 through FIG. 20-34 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect form of the puzzle effect. As shown in FIG. 20-32 (A), in the variation display of the decorative design in which the execution of the puzzle effect has not been determined, the effect display of the puzzle effect is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol on the left middle right is displayed. Is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (B), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the change time, and further, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (C), the change of the next decorative symbol is performed. It is assumed that the display has been started. In the example shown in FIG. 20-32 (C), it is assumed that at the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol, the execution of the puzzle effect is determined and the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (C), for example, an effect screen (puzzle effect screen) 150IW106 for a puzzle effect is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the image display device 5, and a puzzle effect is started.

  FIG. 20-32 (D) is an enlarged view of the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 shown in FIG. 20-32 (C). As shown in FIG. 20-32 (D), on the puzzle effect screen 150IW106, a puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1), a puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and a puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) are displayed. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 20-32 (D), one piece 150IW107-1 has already been gathered in the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1), and no more pieces have been gathered in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2). The puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) shows a case where two pieces have already been gathered.

  Next, based on the puzzle effect 2 being determined, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (E), one new piece 150IW108-1 jumps in the puzzle effect screen 150IW106, and the puzzle 150IW107 ( An effect is performed to stimulate which of the puzzles 1) to 150IW109 (puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (F), the new piece 150IW108-1 finally fits within the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the number of pieces of the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) increases by one. An effect is performed. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished, the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 is erased, and the puzzle effect ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (G), it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect has not been determined in the next variation display of the decorative symbol, and the image display device is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-33 (G). In 5, the effect display of the puzzle effect is not displayed, and the variable display of the decorative pattern in the middle left is displayed.

  Next, after that, the puzzle display is not executed, and the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is not executed. As shown in FIG. 20-33 (H), the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed on the image display device 5. It is assumed that the state is reached. In this example, when the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed, a puzzle display screen (puzzle display screen) 150IW110 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, the display of the puzzle display is started, and the current collection status of the puzzles 150IW107 (puzzle 1), puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) are displayed.

  After that, it is assumed that the game is started again, the decorative display is displayed a plurality of times, and the puzzle effect is also performed a plurality of times. Then, at the time of starting the variation display of a certain decorative symbol, it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect is determined and the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect, and the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 is displayed. It is assumed that the puzzle production has started. FIG. 20-34 (I) is an enlarged view of the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 20-34 (I), the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) has already collected three pieces 150IW107-1, and the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) has already collected four pieces. The puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) shows a case where four pieces have already been gathered.

  Next, based on the puzzle effect 2 being determined, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (J), one new piece 150IW108-5 is jumped in the puzzle effect screen 150IW106, and the puzzle 150IW107 ( An effect is performed to stimulate which of the puzzles 1) to 150IW109 (puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (K), the new piece 150IW108-5 finally fits in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the number of pieces of the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) increases by one. An effect is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (K), the pieces in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) are aligned to the maximum number of five pieces, and the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) is completed. , A character display such as "Puzzle 2 completed!" Is displayed. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (L), a character "2" appears in the completed puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2), and the set value is the set value "2". Is suggested.

  Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 20-34 (L), the case where the number “2” is displayed to directly suggest that the set value is “2” is shown. It is not limited. For example, instead of such a direct expression, a picture corresponding to the set value "2" (a picture reminiscent of the set value "2") appears and displayed when the puzzle is completed. It may be.

  20-32 to 20-34, a case is shown in which puzzle 2 is completed and it is suggested that the set value is “2”, but the set value “1” or the set value “3” is suggested. Also, a puzzle effect is executed in the same effect mode.

  Note that, in the present feature unit 150IW, the role product effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also performed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed in preference to the jackpot suggestion effect (or the pre-game suggestion effect or the game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, the occurrence of an error can be appropriately reported. Also, a case where a predetermined effect (for example, a specific effect mode of a fanfare effect) that can be executed simultaneously with the big hit suggestion effect is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect. , A suggestion effect during a big hit may be prioritized. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect, the image is displayed by the big hit suggestion effect. The image may be preferentially displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  Also, in the present characteristic portion 150IW, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative symbol is variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having the decorative symbol on the surface. (That is, it may be applied to a so-called drum-type gaming machine). Alternatively, the decorative symbol may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative symbol on the surface (that is, the decorative symbol may be applied to a so-called belt reel type gaming machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel-type gaming machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal operation at the start of the initial change after the setting change (or characteristic). Operation may occur). Therefore, in the initial fluctuation after the setting change, a light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the execution ratio is increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, in the present feature portion 150IW, the role product effect and the light guide plate effect are configured so as to be able to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the suggestion effect before the game, and the suggestion effect during the game may be reduced by performing the role item effect or the light guide plate effect. Also, in this case, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when an undesirable indication is given to the player. For example, when the even initial number is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility thereof is reduced. In this case, the ratio of executing a role effect in which the movable member operates or a light guide plate effect of displaying characters and pictures using the light guide plate may be increased. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the character effect and the light guide plate effect, but also includes a control for outputting a predetermined sound, a control for vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control for causing a decorative illuminant such as a decorative LED to emit light in a predetermined mode. , The player's attention may be directed to another, and the visibility of the initial presentation effect, the suggestion effect before the game, and the suggestion effect during the game may be reduced (or made less noticeable).

  Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature section 150IW, a simultaneous effect performed based on a measurement result (a measurement result using a measurement timer or a real-time clock set at power-on) is performed in a specific mode. , The setting may be suggested.

  In addition, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) suggesting a setting is made in accordance with the number of times the variable display is executed continuously without the hold memory becoming 0 and the number of start winnings exceeding the upper limit hold memory number. Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

  Further, based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the predetermined operation valid period, a setting suggestion effect (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined control (Light emission control of a lamp, etc.) may be executed.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 150IW has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in the present example, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention, the present invention is not limited thereto. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the characteristic section 150IW, the form in which the security cover 150IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 150IW001a is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 150IW003 side. Is also good. Specifically, as a first modification, as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A) and 20-35 (B), a security cover 150IW500B composed of a short piece 150IW500Ba and a long piece 150IW500Bb is attached to, for example, a board case 150IW201. The right end of the long piece 150IW500Bb is slidably provided in the left-right direction between a covering position covering the right side of the board case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 and a covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position.

  On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 150IW201, so that the security cover 150IW500Bb is set via the through hole 150IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 150IW500Bb. The key 150IW051 can be operated. That is, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the sliding movement in the left and right direction with respect to the board case 150IW201 is performed with the security cover 150IW500B (the long piece 150IW500Bb) covering the setting key 150IW051. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state by being regulated. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 150IW051 is covered, thereby allowing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to operate. The state can be released from the restricted state (can be changed to the allowable state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A) and 20-35 (B), when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the projection size of the security cover 150IW500B from the board case 150IW201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500B is slid with respect to the board case 150IW201, so that the projection size of the security cover 150IW500B from the board case 150IW201 is extended to the length L2. (L2> L1).

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (A), when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 150IW500B projects from the board case 150IW201. By sliding the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the length L2 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), the clerk of the amusement arcade operates the setting key 150IW051 to set the pachinko gaming machine 1 Can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (B), the security cover 150IW500B is attached to the board case 150IW201 until the protrusion dimension from the board case 150IW201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, unless it is slid (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 150IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 150IW001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003. Has become.

  For this reason, in the first modification, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be prevented from closing the gaming machine frame 150IW003 while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowed state, so that the security cover 150IW500B covers the setting key 150IW051. Forgetting, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 150IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit can be prevented, and security can be improved.

  In a state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 150IW500Ba is disposed between the outer frame 150IW001a and the gaming machine frame 150IW003, so that the movement in the left-right direction from the covering position is restricted. However, the security cover 150IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state in which the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500B is maintained.

(Modification 2)
Further, as a mode in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 150IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. Between a vertical position of a pivot 150IW500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 150IW003 and a coating position covering the right side of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051, and a coating release position rotated from the coating position. May be pivotally supported. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 150IW500Ca is locked by the locking portion 150IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 150IW001a, and the long piece 150IW500Cb is connected to the setting key 150IW051 on the back side. What is necessary is just to restrict rotation to the back side from the state where it covers from above.

  When the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the state where the setting key 150IW051 is covered is released by rotating the security cover 150IW500C around the pivot 150IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 150IW201. The operation can be performed. In other words, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the rotation is restricted in a state where the security cover 150IW500C (the long piece 150IW500Cb) covers the setting key 150IW051, and thereby the pachinko gaming machine is controlled. 1 is maintained in a regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500C is rotated around the pivot 150IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 150IW051 is covered. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the restricted state (it can be changed to an allowable state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (A), the security cover 150IW500C in the second modification rotates around the pivot 150IW500Cd (puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 into an allowed state), thereby forming a game room. By operating a setting key 150IW051 by a clerk or the like, a set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (B), the security cover 150IW500C is rotated clockwise in plan view and the setting key is set by the security cover 150IW500C. Unless the 150IW051 is covered (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the restricted state), the security cover 150IW500C abuts on the front end of the outer frame 150IW001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003. Has become.

  For this reason, in the second modification, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be prevented from closing the gaming machine frame 150IW003 while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowed state, so that the security cover 150IW500C covers the setting key 150IW051. Forgetting, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 150IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit can be prevented, and security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Also, in the above-mentioned characteristic portion 150IW, the mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 150IW003 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is not limited to this. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by opening the 150IW003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 150IW003a in this manner, a third modification is shown in FIGS. 20-39 (A) to 20-39 (C). In this manner, the through-hole 150IW003b may be formed below the gaming machine frame 150IW003, and the setting key 150IW051 may be operated via the through-hole 150IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the main board 11 such as an IC is disposed toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 150IW051 is disposed on the surface of the main substrate 11 opposite to the mounting surface. .

  When the setting key 150IW051 can be operated via the through-hole 150IW003b in this manner, a door 150IW003c capable of opening and closing the through-hole 150IW003b is provided, and the setting key 150IW051 is opened when the door 150IW003c is closed. The operation may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 20-39 (B) and 20-39 (C), when the door 150IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 150IW003, the glass door frame 150IW003a is closed to close the door. Since the 150IW003c is held between the glass door frame 150IW003a and the game machine frame 150IW003 so as to be openable and closable, it is possible to strongly prevent the setting key 150IW051 from being illicitly operated when the glass door frame 150IW003a is closed. And security can be improved.

As described above, the present invention 150IW includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. . Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that effect display control is performed based on a set value, and a process of displaying giraffe, elephant, and lion character images is executed at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be, for example, when a special symbol fluctuates, etc., but may also be regular (when all fluctuations occur, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (when a random number lottery is won, etc.). It is described that it may be present. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, in the gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, the effect is not necessarily produced. Cannot be increased. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a puzzle effect) (for example, selecting a process table including a puzzle effect in step 150 IWS 606 in the effect control CPU 120 to execute step 150 IWS 608 and the variable display effect process (step S 172)). To perform)
The suggestion effect execution means,
When a display is performed in which a plurality of specific components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1)) are gathered, the maximum number of the specific suggestion effects (for example, 5 in the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) (for example, 5 The puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1) is completed by gathering all the pieces up to the number of pieces), and it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the set value "1").
When a display is performed in which a plurality of special constituent elements (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3)) are gathered, a special suggestion effect (for example, the maximum number (for example, 5 Is completed, the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) is completed, and the effect that the set value "3" is suggested) can be executed.
In a different manner in accordance with the set value that is set, a display in which the specific component and the special component are gathered is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. Has a slightly higher execution rate of puzzle effect 1, and the pieces of puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) tend to be gathered slightly, and, for example, as shown in FIG. Indicates that the execution ratio of puzzle effect 3 is slightly higher, and pieces of puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) are more likely to gather.)
According to this feature, according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player, the effect is produced. Can be enhanced.

  In this example, a case where an image such as a piece of a puzzle is displayed as a specific component or a special component has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which sounds of various musical instruments are output as specific components or special components, and a set value that is set when the output sounds are aligned can be suggested.

  Further, in the present example, as a specific example of the “display in which the specific component and the special component are gathered in a different mode according to the set value that has been set”, as shown in FIGS. Although the case has been described in which the puzzle pieces corresponding to the set values are slightly easily collected, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, depending on the set value, the puzzle is gathered up to the maximum value (5 in this example) to make a difference whether or not the puzzle is completed, the way in which puzzle pieces are gathered in the middle is different, Various modes are conceivable, such as changing the ease of obtaining pieces.

  Further, in this example, the case where the puzzle effect is executed during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol and the effect that the pieces of the puzzle are gathered is performed is described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a configuration may be made in which a puzzle effect is performed during a jackpot game to perform an effect in which pieces of the puzzle are gathered.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the first invention,
When the set value that is set is a specific set value (for example, the set value “1”), the suggestion effect execution means can execute the specific suggestion effect, but cannot execute the special suggestion effect (for example, In the case of Y in step 150IWS813, the effect control CPU 120 can execute steps 150IWS815 to S818 to execute the puzzle effect 1, but if N in step 150IWS813 and Y in step 150IWS814, step 150IWS815. Cancel the puzzle effect without shifting to S818)
According to such a configuration, a staging effect is provided in a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player. Can be increased.

  In this example, when the set value is “1”, it is ensured that no part other than puzzle 1 is completed, and when the set value is “2”, no part other than puzzle 2 is completed. In the case where the setting value is “3”, a configuration is described in which the puzzle 3 is not completed except for the puzzle 3, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the setting value “1” is particularly low in the degree of advantage, the puzzle 3 corresponding to the setting value “3” having the high degree of advantage is limited so as not to be completed. You may comprise so that the puzzle other than the puzzle corresponding to the set value set may be completed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 3 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means determines whether or not to perform a display for collecting a specific component or a special component based on a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, winning in the lottery process of the presence or absence of a puzzle effect in step 150IWS802). Production (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-33 (E) and 20-34 (J), one new piece flies, and any of puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) to puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) It is described that a new puzzle may be executed to create a new puzzle). According to such a configuration, any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is described. In the gaming machine configured to be able to be set to the set value, the effect can be enhanced.

  In this example, a case has been described in which an effect is created in which one new piece flies and a new puzzle fits into one of puzzles 150IW107 (puzzle 1) to 150IW109 (puzzle 3). However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even if you perform an effect that stimulates whether or not you can acquire a piece, or if you display a plurality of pieces and perform an effect that inspires which of those pieces you can acquire, Often, various embodiments are conceivable.

  Further, in the present example, the case where the lottery process is performed for each variable display and the predetermined condition is satisfied based on winning in the lottery process has been described as the “predetermined condition”, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a puzzle effect may be executed assuming that a predetermined condition has been established based on a big hit, or a puzzle effect may be executed assuming that a predetermined condition has been established based on the appearance of a predetermined notice effect. Various modes can be considered as the predetermined condition.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can perform a display for collecting a specific component and a special component regardless of the set value that is set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 to 27). In any of the puzzle production mode determination tables A to D, the execution ratio of any of the puzzle productions 1 to 3 is at most 1 to 3% higher than the other puzzle productions. Pieces are easy to gather to some extent)
According to such a configuration, a staging effect is provided in a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player. Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means performs a display (for example, a puzzle display screen 150IW110 shown in FIG. 20-33 (H)) for confirming the state of the specific component and the special component being collected (for example, for effect control). Step of executing step 150 IWS 518 in CPU 120)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted. That is, in this example, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by showing the state of the puzzle pieces being collected. In particular, in this example, when the number of changes is 1000 or less, puzzle pieces corresponding to the set value “3” having a high degree of advantage are likely to be collected, so that the setting is highly advantageous for the player. Can be expected, and the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

  In this example, a case is shown in which the puzzle display screen 150IW110 is displayed during the customer waiting demonstration display so that it is possible to confirm the acquisition status of the pieces of each puzzle or to confirm the status of the completed puzzle. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, an arrangement may be made in which the status of obtaining the pieces of each puzzle or the status of the completed puzzle is incorporated in the interface screen and constantly displayed, so that the status can always be confirmed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means performs a display in which a predetermined number (for example, 3 to 4) of special components corresponding to a high advantage are gathered even if the set value is a low advantage. (For example, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (A), in puzzle effect mode determination table A, the determination ratio of puzzle effect 3 is 2 to 2 compared to the determination ratio of other puzzle effects 1 and 2. (The puzzle effect 3 is executed and the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 is increased by one until the display of the decorative symbol is changed 1000 times after the power of the gaming machine is turned on.)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the first invention,
An information output unit (for example, a part for executing steps 150 IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) capable of specifying which set value is set. Prepare,
Suggestion effect execution means,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, a suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before a game, a suggestion effect during a game, a suggestion effect during a big hit) can be executed (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120). 150 IWS 510 to S516, a portion for executing S704 to S709, and S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect execution means,
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game or a suggestion effect during a game in the third effect mode, a suggestion effect during a big hit in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Previous suggestions, suggestions during games, suggestions during big hits)
When the setting value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 includes: By executing steps 150 IWS 515, S 709, and S 906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed.
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

  In the feature section 150IW, for example, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up, and the value of each piece counter is reset when the power of the gaming machine is turned off. When inserted, each puzzle is started in a reset state. The power of at least a part of the RAM 122 may be backed up to back up the value of each piece counter or the like. In this case, each piece counter stored in the RAM 122 stored in the RAM 122 in response to a reset operation by a game clerk. You may comprise so that a value etc. can be reset.

  Further, in the above case, for example, the gaming machine may be configured to start up with some pieces of some puzzles gathered when the gaming shop is opened. Further, in this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the set value is suggested according to which puzzle pieces are activated in a state where they are gathered. Further, the game machine may be configured so that there is a pattern in which the game machine is started when any puzzle has already been completed when the game store is opened.

In addition, the present invention 150IW includes the following second invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. . Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that a setting change process is executed when a power switch is operated to an ON side in a state where a front frame is opened and a setting key switch is operated to an ON side. . Further, it is described that the RAM area other than the setting value storage unit is cleared in the setting change processing. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, in a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player, it is not always appropriate to use the gaming machine. There is a possibility that processing cannot be performed. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operation means (for example, a clear switch) provided so as to be able to execute initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing, RAM clear 2 processing) based on operation performed when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing specific information (for example, a RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value changing process for changing a set value, a process executing means for executing the process using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, steps 150IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 100, (A portion for executing S034, S048). According to this feature, a setting value of any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player is provided. In a gaming machine configured to be settable, it is possible to suitably perform processing. In particular, in a process that requires a certain amount of processing time, such as a change in a set value, specific information (in this example, a RAM clear flag) is stored, and the RAM clear flag is checked and the process is executed. It can be performed.

  In this example, as a process to be executed “using the specific information a plurality of times”, a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is transmitted in steps 150 IWS 226 and S 207 depending on whether the RAM clear flag is set in step 150 IWS 225. To control whether or not to execute the process of changing the set values of steps 150IWS035-S042 according to whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 150IWS034, and to clear the RAM in step 150IWS048. Although the case where the recovery processing or the RAM clear 1 processing of steps 150 IWS049 and S051 is executed according to whether or not the flag is set has been described, the embodiment is not limited thereto. For example, whether or not the operation switch is enabled may be controlled immediately before the operation of changing the set value according to whether or not the specific information (RAM clear flag) is set.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the second invention,
The process executing means changes the set value based on the operation of the operating means in the set value changing process (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150 IWS 039 to S 042).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the operating means can also be used, so that an increase in cost can be suppressed. In other words, in this example, the clear switch can be used as both an operation unit for performing an operation for initializing the RAM 102 and an operation unit for performing an operation for changing the set value, so that an increase in cost can be suppressed. it can.

  In this example, since the clear switch is also used, it is necessary to check the state of the clear switch a plurality of times when turning on the power to the gaming machine. When the RAM clear flag is set, the RAM clear flag is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the clear switch for resetting the RAM 102 is operated by checking whether or not the RAM clear flag is set. The operation of the clear switch for the change operation can be suitably performed by confirming the state of the clear switch itself.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the second invention,
Normal initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing) is executed based on the operation of the operating means when power supply to the gaming machine is started, while power supply to the gaming machine is started. Initialization processing executing means (for example, a part for executing steps 150 IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 100) for executing initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality. )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) in which storage contents are cleared in the normal initialization processing;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which stored contents are cleared in the initialization processing at the time of the abnormality.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for a player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the second invention,
Determining means (for example, a part for executing step 150 IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can determine that the operating means has been operated based on the state of the operating means being switched from the off state to the on state;
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the determination means determining that the operation means has been operated in the set value change processing (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines in step 150 IWS041 If Y, execute step 150 IWS042),
The determining means sets the initial state of the operating means when power supply to the gaming machine is started to an on state, and determines whether the operating means is operated (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 Executes N in step 150 IWS036, and executes step 150 IWS037)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for a player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
A timer interrupt processing execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S21 to S27 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a timer interrupt process each time a predetermined timer interrupt occurs;
The processing execution means executes the processing using the specific information a plurality of times after the power supply to the gaming machine is started and before the timer interrupt processing is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 Steps 150IWS025, S034, S048 are executed)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for a player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the second invention,
An information output unit (for example, a part for executing steps 150 IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) capable of specifying which set value is set. Prepare,
Suggestion effect execution means,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, a suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before a game, a suggestion effect during a game, a suggestion effect during a big hit) can be executed (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120). 150 IWS 510 to S516, a portion for executing S704 to S709, and S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect execution means,
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game or a suggestion effect during a game in the third effect mode, a suggestion effect during a big hit in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Previous suggestions, suggestions during games, suggestions during big hits)
When the setting value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 includes: By executing steps 150 IWS 515, S 709, and S 906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed.
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

In addition, the present invention 150IW includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-60546. . Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546 describes that if a RAM clear switch is operated and a setting key switch is in an ON state, an initial setting 2 is executed to change a lottery probability. Further, it is described that the setting key switch is used for validating the setting switch, and that the winning probability of a special drawing corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 indicated by the setting switch is set. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546, in a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player, it is not always appropriate. There is a possibility that processing cannot be performed. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operating means (for example, a clear switch);
Processing execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer, etc.) capable of executing a set value change process for changing a set value based on the operation of the operation means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. 100, a part for executing steps 150 IWS039 to S042);
A determination unit (for example, a part that executes step 150 IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can determine that the operation unit has been operated based on the switching of the state of the operation unit from the off state to the on state; Prepare,
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the determination means determining that the operating means has been operated in the set value change processing (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 If Y in 150IWS041, step 150IWS042 is executed),
The determination unit determines whether or not the operation unit has been operated by setting an initial state of the operation unit to the ON state when the setting value change process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 , If N in step 150WS036, execute step 150WS037)
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is preferably processed. It can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent the user from unintentionally changing the set value, even though the operation means (the clear switch in this example) is continuously pressed, and it is possible to appropriately perform the processing. It can be carried out.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the third invention,
A specific information storage unit (for example, a RAM 122) capable of storing specific information (for example, a RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation unit has been operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started;
The processing executing means executes the processing using the specific information a plurality of times when executing a plurality of processings including the setting value changing processing (for example, executing steps 150 IWS025, S034, and S048 in the game control microcomputer 100). Part)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for a player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the third invention,
Normal initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing) is executed based on the operation of the operating means when power supply to the gaming machine is started, while power supply to the gaming machine is started. Initialization processing executing means (for example, a part for executing steps 150 IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 100) for executing initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality. )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) in which storage contents are cleared in the normal initialization processing;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which stored contents are cleared in the initialization processing at the time of the abnormality.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for a player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the third invention,
First state storage means (for example, a previous clear switch buffer) for storing the state of the previous operation means;
Second state storage means (for example, a clear switch buffer) for storing the state of the operation means at this time,
The determining means can determine that the operating means has been operated based on the fact that the storage content of the first state storage means is off and the content of storage of the second state storage means is on ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 150 IWS041),
The first state storage means stores an ON state as a first state of the operation means when the set value change process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 150 IWS037).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for a player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the third invention,
An information output unit (for example, a part for executing steps 150 IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) capable of specifying which set value is set. Prepare,
Suggestion effect execution means,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, a suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before a game, a suggestion effect during a game, a suggestion effect during a big hit) can be executed (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120). 150 IWS 510 to S516, a portion for executing S704 to S709, and S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect execution means,
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game or a suggestion effect during a game in the third effect mode, a suggestion effect during a big hit in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Previous suggestions, suggestions during games, suggestions during big hits)
When the setting value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 includes: By executing steps 150 IWS 515, S 709, and S 906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed.
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

In addition, the present invention 150IW includes the following fourth invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and configured to be able to execute an advantageous state control based on the set set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 discloses that a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after a change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and a setting before and after the change obtained by the change stop command is transmitted. It describes that three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, are displayed based on the values. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestion effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal. In a gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, there is a possibility that the interest in the game is rather reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting any one of a plurality of set values (for example, a set value “1” to a set value “3”) based on a setting operation 150IWS042), and
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
An information output unit (for example, a part that executes steps 150 IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) capable of specifying which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output unit, a suggestion effect execution unit (for example, for effect control, for example, a suggestion effect before a game, a suggestion effect during a game, or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that can execute a suggestion effect. (Steps for executing steps 150 IWS 510 to S 516, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906) in the CPU 120.
When the set value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the suggestion effect execution unit is set to a predetermined set value having a low degree of advantage for a player among the set values of the plurality of stages. In other words, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 150 IWS 513, S707, and S904).
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value is prevented from reducing the interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 2 of the fourth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 150 IWS047 and S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation. Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game, a suggestion effect during game, or a big hit during the fourth effect mode) in which the set value of the set value is high. Suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game, a suggestion effect during game, or a suggestion effect during big hit) in which the set value of the set value is low in specificity can be executed. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance a staging effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the fourth invention,
Using a plurality of types of decision data (for example, a suggestion effect determination table before game, a suggestion effect determination table during game, a suggestion effect determination table during jackpot) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined. A suggestion effect determining means (for example, a portion for executing steps 150 IWS511, S513, S515, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the effect control CPU 120);
The suggestion effect determination means,
Using the decision data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of decision data, the execution mode of the suggested effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122). Steps IWS511, S705, and S902 are executed based on the set value that is set).
When the set value information is not input normally, the execution mode of the suggested effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to a predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Executes steps 150 IWS 513, S707, and S904 based on the set value "1".)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

  In the present characteristic unit 150IW, “determining the execution mode of the suggested effect” is a concept including not only determining whether or not to execute the suggested effect but also determining the effect mode of the suggested effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, at least during a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, indicates a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player may be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time zone. Motivation to perform, and enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting change is performed 30 times after the change display is performed)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestion effect can be executed at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B), and FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B)).
It is described that a notifying unit (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517) that can notify information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided. In this way, it is possible to confirm the suggestive effects executed in the past, and to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 8 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different rate depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-29 (A), (B), etc.),
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect) according to an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. Predetermined light effect execution means capable of executing light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted; see FIG. 20-29 (D)). It is described that it may be further provided with such a configuration, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 9 of the fourth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at a different rate according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined informing means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is described that it may be further provided with a hard-to-become accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, and the like. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 10 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, and the like) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 11 of the fourth invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to variable display differs depending on the set value that has been set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 12 of the fourth invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member (for example, a security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit;
When the opening / closing body is closed, the regulating member maintains the regulated state in which the operation on the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed). When the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500A is maintained in a state where the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is regulated by the security cover 150IW500A. 20 is released, and the operation of the setting key 150IW051 is permitted. FIG. 20-2, FIG. 20-3, FIG. 20-35 to FIG. 20-38)
It is described that this may be done. According to such a configuration, security is improved.

In addition, the present invention 150IW includes the following fifth invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and configured to be able to execute an advantageous state control based on the set set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 discloses that a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after a change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and a setting before and after the change obtained by the change stop command is transmitted. It describes that three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, are displayed based on the values. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestion effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal. In a gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, there is a possibility that the interest in the game is rather reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting any one of a plurality of set values (for example, a set value “1” to a set value “3”) based on a setting operation 150IWS042), and
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
An information output unit (for example, a part that executes steps 150 IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) capable of specifying which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output unit, a suggestion effect execution unit (for example, for effect control, for example, a suggestion effect before a game, a suggestion effect during a game, or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that can execute a suggestion effect. (Steps for executing steps 150 IWS 510 to S 516, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906) in the CPU 120.
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the suggestion effect execution unit restricts execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S150IWS514 that N, S708 (If N is N in S905, the suggested effect before the game, the suggested effect during the game, and the suggested effect during the big hit are not executed.)
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value is prevented from reducing the interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 150 IWS047 and S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation. Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game, a suggestion effect during game, or a big hit during the fourth effect mode) in which the set value of the set value is high. Suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game, a suggestion effect during game, or a suggestion effect during big hit) in which the set value of the set value is low in specificity can be executed. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance a staging effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, at least during a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, indicates a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player may be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time zone. Motivation to perform, and enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting change is performed 30 times after the change display is performed)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestion effect can be executed at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B), and FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B)).
It is described that a notifying unit (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517) that can notify information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided. In this way, it is possible to confirm the suggestive effects executed in the past, and to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different rate depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-29 (A), (B), etc.),
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect) according to an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. Predetermined light effect execution means capable of executing light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted; see FIG. 20-29 (D)). It is described that it may be further provided with such a configuration, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 8 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at a different rate according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined informing means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is described that it may be further provided with a hard-to-become accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, and the like. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 9 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, and the like) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 10 of the fifth invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to variable display differs depending on the set value that has been set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 11 of the fifth invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member (for example, a security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit;
When the opening / closing body is closed, the regulating member maintains the regulated state in which the operation on the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed). When the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500A is maintained in a state where the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is regulated by the security cover 150IW500A. 20 is released, and the operation of the setting key 150IW051 is permitted. FIG. 20-2, FIG. 20-3, FIG. 20-35 to FIG. 20-38)
It is described that this may be done. According to such a configuration, security is improved.

In addition, the present invention 150IW includes the following sixth invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and configured to be able to execute an advantageous state control based on the set set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 discloses that a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after a change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and a setting before and after the change obtained by the change stop command is transmitted. It describes that three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, are displayed based on the values. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestion effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal. In a gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, there is a possibility that the interest in the game is rather reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting any one of a plurality of set values (for example, a set value “1” to a set value “3”) based on a setting operation 150IWS042), and
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
An information output unit (for example, a part that executes steps 150 IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) capable of specifying which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output unit, a suggestion effect execution unit (for example, for effect control, for example, a suggestion effect before a game, a suggestion effect during a game, or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that can execute a suggestion effect. (Steps for executing steps 150 IWS 510 to S 516, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906) in the CPU 120.
The suggestion effect execution means,
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game or a suggestion effect during a game in the third effect mode, a suggestion effect during a big hit in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Previous suggestions, suggestions during games, suggestions during big hits)
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect without executing the first suggestion effect as the suggestion effect (for example, By performing steps 150 IWS 515, S 709, and S 906, effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode according to the third effect mode.
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value is prevented from reducing the interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 150 IWS047 and S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation. Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game, a suggestion effect during game, or a big hit during the fourth effect mode) in which the set value of the set value is high. Suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game, a suggestion effect during game, or a suggestion effect during big hit) in which the set value of the set value is low in specificity can be executed. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance a staging effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the sixth invention,
Using a plurality of types of decision data (for example, a suggestion effect determination table before game, a suggestion effect determination table during game, a suggestion effect determination table during jackpot) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined. A suggestion effect determining means (for example, a portion for executing steps 150 IWS511, S513, S515, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the effect control CPU 120);
The suggestion effect determination means,
Using the decision data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of decision data, the execution mode of the suggested effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122). Steps IWS511, S705, and S902 are executed based on the set value that is set).
If the set value information is not correctly input, using dedicated decision data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, a suggestion effect determination table during game, a suggestion effect determination table during jackpot), The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the big hit suggestion effect determination table to perform step 150 IWS 515. , S709, and S906)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, at least during a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, indicates a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player may be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time zone. Motivation to perform, and enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting change is performed 30 times after the change display is performed)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestion effect can be executed at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B), and FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B)).
It is described that a notifying unit (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517) that can notify information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided. In this way, it is possible to confirm the suggestive effects executed in the past, and to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 8 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different rate depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-29 (A), (B), etc.),
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect) according to an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. Predetermined light effect execution means capable of executing light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted; see FIG. 20-29 (D)). It is described that it may be further provided with such a configuration, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 9 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at a different rate according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined informing means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is described that it may be further provided with a hard-to-become accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, and the like. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 10 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, and the like) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 11 of the sixth invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to variable display differs depending on the set value that has been set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 12 of the sixth invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member (for example, a security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit;
When the opening / closing body is closed, the regulating member maintains the regulated state in which the operation on the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed). When the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500A is maintained in a state where the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is regulated by the security cover 150IW500A. 20 is released, and the operation of the setting key 150IW051 is permitted. FIG. 20-2, FIG. 20-3, FIG. 20-35 to FIG. 20-38)
It is described that this may be done. According to such a configuration, security is improved.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 150IW, it is comprised so that it can be changed to three types of production modes A to C. When the production mode A is controlled, if the set value information is not input normally, Assuming that the suggested effect is set to a predetermined value that is low for the player, the suggestion effect is configured to be executable (the configuration of the fourth aspect of the invention). When the information is not input normally, the configuration is such that the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted (the configuration of the fifth invention), and when the effect mode C is controlled, the set value information is input normally. If not, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect is configured to be executable as the suggestion effect (the configuration of the sixth invention). I can't. For example, it is possible to switch which of the above-described fourth invention to the sixth invention is to execute the suggested effect according to the game state. In this case, for example, if the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not correctly input, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect as if it is set to a predetermined value with a low degree of advantage for the player. In the configuration (the configuration of the above-described fourth invention), if the game state is the time reduction state, the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted if the setting value information is not normally input (the above-described fifth invention). If the game state is a probable change state, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect if the set value information is not input normally. (Configuration of the sixth invention).

  Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestion effect to be executable by all the control methods of the fourth to sixth inventions described above, and the suggestion effect is configured to be executable using only one of the control methods. Is also good.

  Also, in the case where the setting value command itself cannot be received due to a missing data or garbled data, the feature unit 150IW controls the execution of the suggestion effect by the control method according to the fourth to sixth aspects of the invention (suggestion). Although the effect is limited), the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when the set value command is received, the suggested effect may be limited when the received set value command is inconsistent. In this case, for example, every time a set value command is received, the effect control means stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and then, when a new set value command is received, When the set value indicated by the received set value command and the previously stored set value do not match, it is determined that inconsistency has occurred, and the execution of the suggestion effect is performed by the control methods of the fourth to sixth inventions. The control may be performed (the suggestion effect is limited).

  Further, the way of making the game different at each of the set values “1” to “3” is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in the case of a set value of an odd number such as a set value “1” or “3”, when a consecutive villa (a large hit occurs continuously during a probable change state or the like) is likely to occur and a consecutive villa is generated. It is configured so that the difference from the time when it is difficult is large, and in the case of a set value of an even number such as a set value “2”, the likelihood of the occurrence of the extended house is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect indicating that the number is an odd number may be configured to be executable. In this case, when the set value command is not normally received, the control method according to the fourth to sixth aspects described above controls the execution of the suggestion effect indicating that the set value is an odd number. (Restricting suggested effects).

  Further, the control method for executing the suggestion effect when the set value command is not normally received as described in the fourth to sixth inventions can be applied to a puzzle effect as a suggestion effect.

Further, the present invention includes the following seventh invention in the characteristic portion 150IW. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
A suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestion effect execution means, at least during a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) with a different ratio according to the set value set. And initial presentation effects) can be executed. According to this feature, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, Motivation to perform the game, and enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of effect identification information (for example, decorative symbols),
The suggestion effect execution means, during a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, a suggestion effect in which different effect identification information is displayed according to the set value set (for example, It is described that it is possible to execute the display of an odd-numbered initial appearance), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 20). (As shown in -20 (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestive effect determination table having different determination values is used.)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) suggesting a set value after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher reliability for the set value suggested than the suggestion effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the seventh invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first winning opening, the second winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information related to a game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that can display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the present invention 150IW includes an eighth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the motive for playing the game cannot be effectively given, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
A suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestion effect execution means may be configured to set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting change is performed and the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. The suggested effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (for example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B), and FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B)).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described. According to this feature, motivation to play a game for a predetermined period can be given, and amusement of a game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern,
Variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns at a different ratio between when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed (for example, as shown in FIGS. B)),
It is described that the variable display execution means may be able to execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the eighth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern,
Variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns at a different ratio when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B)).
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, that the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect has reached a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect, Based on the execution of the announcement effect or the like, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed. (See A) and (B))
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance game entertainment.

Further, as a game machine of the means 5 of the eighth invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first winning opening, the second winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information related to a game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that can display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the feature portion 150IW includes the ninth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there was a problem that suggestive effects executed in the past could not be confirmed, and the entertainment could not be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the ninth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
A suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B)).
A gaming machine further comprising a notifying unit (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect is described. In this way, it is possible to confirm the suggestive effects executed in the past, and to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 2 of the ninth invention,
The notifying unit can notify the number of times the suggested effect has been executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the ninth invention,
The notifying unit can notify the contents of the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the ninth invention,
The notifying unit can notify the information on the executed suggestion effect while waiting for the customer in which the variable display is not executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the ninth invention,
Information generating means for generating information (for example, execution history information) related to the executed suggestion effect;
Image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an imaging device;
It is described that a display unit (for example, the image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a form capable of being picked up by the image pickup device may be provided. Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the ninth invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first winning opening, the second winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information related to a game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that can display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the present invention includes the following tenth aspect of the present invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize by another effect, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
A suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect) according to an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. Predetermined light effect execution means capable of executing light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
And limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is limited. (See (D))
A gaming machine characterized by the following is described, and according to this feature, a decrease in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timing of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, executing one of them during the fanfare period and ending the other with the ending Change it to run during the period)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggested effect is executed (for example, the execution of the character effect is prohibited when the suggested effect during the big hit is executed. See FIG. 20-29 (D)). )
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting unit executes the predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not easily recognized (for example, the movable member 150IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal operation mode (for example, during the big hit). Control so that it does not stop at the position where it overlaps the dialogue image produced by the effect
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the tenth invention,
Both the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include a display on one display unit (for example, the image display device 5).
It is described that the one display means may display a display relating to a suggestive effect prior to a display relating to a predetermined effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. Can be.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the tenth invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first winning opening, the second winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information related to a game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that can display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature part 150IW also includes the following eleventh invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the setting suggestive effect that is not preferable for the player is executed, which may lower the interest. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the eleventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
Setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at a different rate according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined informing means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. A gaming machine is further provided with a hard-to-find role-playing effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, and the like. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing predetermined notification (for example, character effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 150IW101). , Can enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 3 of the eleventh invention,
A light guide plate having a light-transmitting property capable of transmitting light (for example, a light guide plate 150IW103);
A light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from an end face of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion for reflecting light incident into the light guide plate from the end face of the light guide plate by the light emitting body and emitting the light to the front of the gaming machine,
The predetermined notification means is capable of executing predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) for emitting light from the reflector provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitter to emit light. According to such a configuration, the effect can be enhanced.

Further, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the eleventh invention,
The setting suggestion execution means includes a first setting suggestion indicating that the setting is set to the first setting value (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit in the first effect mode. See FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B)). A second setting suggestion indicating that the second setting value which is more advantageous to the player than the first setting value is set (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit in the third effect mode. FIG. 20-29 ( A) and (B)).
The predetermined notification unit can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is executed than when the second setting suggestion is executed (for example, see FIG. 20-29 (E)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the eleventh invention,
A setting suggestion setting unit capable of setting an execution ratio of setting suggestion is provided (for example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and an operating unit such as a push button 31B or an operating unit such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (management) Operable only by the user) to change the settings related to the setting suggestion effect)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 7 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine for variably displaying identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) provided with the identification information,
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed. According to such a configuration, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 8 of the eleventh invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first winning opening, the second winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information related to a game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that can display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature part 150IW also includes a twelfth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling may be too high when the setting is high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the twelfth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a jackpot game, an interval period, an ending period, and the like) differs according to the set values (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the twelfth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs according to the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the twelfth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state is different depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the twelfth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs according to the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming value,
A game value assigning means for assigning a game value based on the satisfaction of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value provided by the game value provision means to be larger than the first set value in the magnitude of the game value used in the game. A second setting value (for example, setting value 1) in which the occupying ratio increases, and
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 20-5 (A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating a set value (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) during a predetermined control period in an advantageous state may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest in the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 7 of the twelfth invention,
It is provided with an effect execution means capable of executing an effect,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) regardless of the set value during a predetermined control period in the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest in the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Further, as a game machine of the means 8 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be determined in advance according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling property becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 9 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a plurality of advantageous states,
The game control means can control one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, big hit types A to C) at different rates based on the set value,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is different depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the twelfth invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first winning opening, the second winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information related to a game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that can display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the feature part 150IW includes the following thirteenth invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling may be too high when the setting is high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the thirteenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value,
A predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to variable display differs depending on the set value that has been set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as a gaming machine of the means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The variable display period varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be made different depending on the set value, and according to such a configuration, gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming value,
A game value assigning means for assigning a game value based on the satisfaction of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value provided by the game value provision means to be larger than the first set value in the magnitude of the game value used in the game. A second setting value (for example, setting value 1) in which the occupying ratio increases, and
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be set in advance in accordance with the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling property becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Further, as a gaming machine of the means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern,
Variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different rates according to the set values (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first winning opening, the second winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information related to a game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that can display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  In the characteristic section 150IW, a case has been described in which the setting value can be set in three stages of the setting values "1" to "3". It may be configured to be settable to a value or may be configured to be settable to a two-step set value. In this case, for example, it is configured so that the set value can be set to six levels, and when the set value is “1”, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is the lowest, and when the set value is “6”, the expectation for the big hit ( (Reliability) may be the highest.

  In addition, the configuration shown by the characteristic portion 150IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by another characteristic portion such as the characteristic portion 31AK to form a gaming machine. For example, in the case of executing the puzzle effect, the suggestion effect before game, the suggestion effect during game, and the suggestion effect during big hit, the puzzle effect, the suggestion effect before game, the suggestion effect during game, the suggestion during game, When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the effect, a puzzle effect, a suggestion effect before a game, a suggestion effect during a game, and a title corresponding to a suggestion effect during a big hit may be notified in the same manner as the characteristic portion 31AK. .

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special design display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Effect control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23: Count switch 30: Hitting operation handle 31A: Stick controller 31B: Push button 32: Movable body 100: Game control microcomputer 101, 121: ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124: random number circuit 105, 125: I / O
120… effect control CPU
123 ... display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled,
Title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
A gaming machine, wherein the title notifying unit is capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect.